• Skip to primary navigation
  • Skip to main content
  • Skip to primary sidebar

Fantabulosity logo

  • All Recipes
  • Vintage Recipes
  • Holiday
  • Dinner Theme System
  • About
  • Navigation Menu: Social Icons

    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest
    • TikTok
    • YouTube
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Recipes
  • Desserts
  • Dinners
  • Gatherings
  • Holidays
  • About Jessica
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest
    • TikTok
    • YouTube
  • search icon
    Homepage link
    • Recipes
    • Desserts
    • Dinners
    • Gatherings
    • Holidays
    • About Jessica
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest
    • TikTok
    • YouTube
  • ×
    Home » Recipes

    How to Cook Burgers on the Stove

    How to Cook Burgers on the Stove

    October 22, 2023

    Burgers cooked on the stove

    Cooking burgers on the stove-top in a frying pan can be a quick and easy way to get an easy dinner on the table, FAST! Cook from fresh OR frozen with this easy recipe!

    Hamburger recipes are a great, easy dinner recipe, especially when you can mix things up with toppings, ways to cook them, and more! You can even make them for a burger bar and let everyone create their own!

    Burgers cooked on the stove

    Baking burgers in the oven is our favorite way to cook cheeseburgers… but sometimes cooking them in a frying pan is must faster and a little more convenient. (Especially when you don’t want to heat up the kitchen with the oven – which, is when we may also make some of these delicious sloppy joes that we love so much.)

    So whether or not you have fresh ground beef patties or you have frozen burgers on hand (such as Bubba’s Burgers) here is how you can easily make a juicy burger on the stove!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    All it takes for a standard burger on the stove is ground beef (or pre-made hamburger patties) and a little salt and pepper.

    raw burger patty - Bubbas frozen burger
    • 3 burger patties (or 1 lb. ground beef, shaped in to 3 patties)
    • salt
    • black pepper

    See the full recipe card at the bottom of the post for ingredients and measurement suggestions.

    You can also add your favorite toppings after cooking as well! (See the list below of our favorite burger topping ideas.)

    Step by Step Instructions

    Cooking burgers on the stove-top can be done with fresh or frozen burger patties.

    For Fresh Hamburger Patties

    1. Season fresh hamburger patties, on both sides, with salt and pepper.
    2. Over medium heat, melt 1 tablespoon of butter in a skillet large enough to hold all of your burger patties.
    3. Place seasoned burgers in skillet and cook for 3-5 minutes and then flip.
    4. Cook for an additional 3-5 minutes or until the juices run clear.

    Remove from skillet and place on buns and top with your favorite ingredients.

    For Frozen Hamburger Patties (Like Bubba’s Burgers)

    Steps 1-4 of how to cook burgers on the stove.
    1. Over low-medium heat, melt 1 tablespoon of butter in a skillet big enough to hold all of your burger patties.
    2. Place frozen patties in skillet and after a couple of minutes, season with salt and pepper. (You wait just a bit so the burger thaws some, so it can soak in the salt and pepper seasonings.)
    3. Cook on first side for about 5-6 minutes and then flip.
    4. After flipping, flip again when red juices have formed at the top.
    5. Continue flipping every couple of minutes for about 15 minutes or until the juices run clear.

    As you can see in photo #3 above, there are still red juices forming at the top. When they are “clear” your burger is ready to pull off of the frying pan.

    Hint: we love using a cast-iron pan to cook burgers in, like when we make our oven-baked steak but it’s not necessary. You can use a regular, non-stick skillet if that’s what you have on hand!

    burger cooked on stove - on bun with cheese and onions with pickle on top

    Substitutions

    This recipe is for ground beef patties but you can also cook turkey burgers or veggie burgers if you prefer. Here’s how:

    For baked turkey burgers, you will cook them for 5-6 minutes on each side, or until internal temperature reaches 155°.

    For veggie burgers, heat 1-2 tablespoons of oil in a skillet and cook veggie burgers over medium-high heat for 4-6 minutes or until heated through.

    Kick things up a notch and make these donut burgers using glazed donuts or these waffle burgers for the buns!

    Want to substitute the red meat completely? Then try these crispy chicken burgers (or zinger burgers) next time!

    Burger Topping Ideas

    For the burger that you see here, we used:

    • nacho cheese (Rico’s canned nacho cheese)
    • sliced red onion
    • baby gherkin pickle
    • chopped fresh parsley

    Other burger topping ideas:

    We went wild on our cheeseburger subs with toppings, so you’ll want to check those out too! But here are other toppings you may like for these stovetop burgers:

    • mustard
    • ketchup
    • white onion
    • sliced cheese
    • sliced pickles
    • make this easy guacamole recipe
    • bacon – cooking bacon in the oven is a great way!
    • lettuce
    • pineapple (like we used on our Aloha Burgers!)
    Burger with nacho cheese, onion and pickle on bun

    Storage

    If you have leftover pan-fried hamburgers, you can store them in an airtight container, in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.

    To reheat, you can place them back in a skillet and reheat over low-medium heat for about 3-5 minutes or until heated through.

    Or, another great way is to reheat leftover burgers in an air fryer for 3-5 minutes!

    More Burger Recipes

    Love hamburgers as much as we do? You’ll love these ideas below, as well as our burger sliders that are super fun for parties or grilling frozen burger patties for a quick dinner!

    • Burger Bar Ideas for an outdoor party
      Burger Bar Ideas for Your Next Party
    • Smoked burger on a white plate, topped with pickles, cheese and tomato.
      Smoked Burger Recipe
    • Blue cheese burger on pretzel bun, with lettuce leaf, sitting next to french fries on plate.
      Blue Cheese Burgers
    • These were SO juicy and easy! Love what she uses. The BEST Cheeseburger recipe!
      Electric Skillet Hamburgers

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    burger on bun with melted cheese, and red onion
    Print Pin
    4.96 from 21 votes

    How to Cook Burgers on the Stove

    Cooking burgers on the stove in a frying pan can be a quick and easy way to get an easy dinner on the table, FAST! Cook from fresh OR frozen with this easy recipe!
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 3 burgers
    Calories 342kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • Stove Top

    Ingredients

    • 4 burger patties (frozen or fresh – see instructions for different times)
    • 1 tablespoon butter
    • ½ teaspoon salt or preferred amount
    • ½ teaspoon pepper or preferred amount

    Instructions

    For Fresh (Thawed) Hamburger Patties

    • For fresh burger patties, season each patty on both sides, with salt and pepper
    • Over medium heat, melt 1 tablespoon of butter in a skillet large enough to hold all of your burger patties
    • Place seasoned burgers in skillet and cook for 3-5 minutes and then flip. Cook for an additional 3-5 minutes or until the juices run clear.

    For Frozen Hamburger Patties on the Stovetop

    • Over low-medium heat, melt 1 tablespoon of butter in a skillet big enough to hold all of your burger patties.
    • Place frozen patties in skillet and after a couple of minutes, season with salt and pepper. (You wait just a bit so the burger thaws some, so it can soak in the salt and pepper seasonings.)
    • Cook on first side for about 5-6 minutes and then flip. After flipping, flip again when red juices have formed at the top.
    • Continue flipping every couple of minutes for about 15 minutes or until the juices run clear.

    Steaming the Buns

    • Place the burgers (or cheeseburgers if you prefer) on buns, and wrap individually in aluminum foil, as I did with my burgers in the oven, to send these over the top!

    Notes

    I love using a cast-iron pan to cook burgers in, like when we make our oven-baked steak but it’s not necessary. You can use a regular, non-stick skillet if that’s what you have on hand!

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1burger | Calories: 342kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 90mg | Sodium: 532mg | Potassium: 411mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 118IU | Calcium: 13mg | Iron: 3mg

    Crockpot Jalapeno Chicken

    October 21, 2023

    Crockpot Jalapeno Chicken

    Looking for comfort? Pull out the slow cooker and make this amazing Jalapeño Chicken that is perfect for an easy dinner without standing over the stove.

    Jalapeno chicken in slow cooker.

    Jalapenos can add the perfect “kick” to a recipe so we’ll use them in traditional recipes at times, to give them a little extra bite! We loved using jalapenos in this jalapeno ranch dip, this artichoke jalapeno dip, and this jalapeno sausage gravy, in case you want to try those too!

    I love using the crockpot for a winner, winner, chicken dinner! The chicken is super tender, and the cheese combines for a perfectly creamy sauce, much like slow cooker chicken enchiladas and this delicious cheesy chicken recipe! Also, it’s an easy way to make a one-dish meal, such as Taco Chicken Casserole, yum.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Strong flavors: Removing the seeds and membranes gives you a great jalapeño flavor without too much spice if that isn’t your thing.
    • Slow cooked, quick: This only takes 3 hours, meaning you can pop it in at lunch and still have a hands-off dinner, similar to this garlic parmesan chicken in the crockpot.
    • Easy-to-use leftovers: The flavors and elements here also make a great dip, so feel free to shred or dice up leftovers to use with chips, or dare I say, shred it like we do with this shredded Caesar chicken in the crock pot.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for jalapeno chicken recipe.
    • Chicken – Boneless skinless chicken breasts are the perfect protein pairing for cheese and peppers. We love using chicken breasts in our easy dinners because they’re so versatile. Make sure you check out this creamy Caesar chicken too!
    • Sour cream – Cools off the heat!
    • Cream cheese – The perfect way to add creaminess to any dish.
    • Bacon – Love the salty crunch this adds to the creamy topping.
    • Jalapeños – Both diced and sliced, I love the flavor of these and they aren’t too spicy.
    • Cheese – Two types to add layers of flavor.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Chicken – swap in chicken tenders here. Aim for about a pound and a half. These are a great option to spread the meal out to more servings. I use chicken tenders in this slow-cooker orange chicken recipe too.
    • Bacon- if you don’t eat pork, try using turkey bacon. Cook it nice and crisp to get the same added texture.

    Variations

    • Cook Method – creamy jalapeño chicken can also be made in the oven. Prepare ingredients as listed except place them in a 9×13 greased baking dish or casserole dish. Bake uncovered at 375° for 30 minutes or until the center of each chicken breast reaches 165° degrees.

    Equipment

    A 6-quart slow cooker is the usual size most people have in their kitchens. 3 chicken breasts will fit perfectly in the bottom. If you have a 7- or 8-quart size, be aware that it may cook slightly faster.

    How to Make Slow Cooker Jalapeño Chicken

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Start by bringing your cream cheese to room temp for easy mixing!

    Steps 1-4 of how to make jalapeno chicken in the crockpot.

    STEP 1. Mix it up. Combine sour cream and cheeses in a bowl. Add the diced peppers, onions, and 4 slices of crumbled bacon (Image 1).

    Tip: Make sure you dice the cream cheese while cold (it’s easier!) and place in a mixing bowl to soften. The smaller pieces will warm up quicker so that you can easily stir in the remaining ingredients.

    STEP 2. Coat chicken. Add the chicken breasts to the bottom a crockpot (Image 2). Carefully spread the entire cheese mixture evenly over the tops of the chicken (Image 3).

    STEP 3. Cook low and slow. Check the temperature for safety after about 3 hours (Image 4).

    Cheese and jalapenos added to cooked chicken in slow cooker.

    STEP 4. Serve. Top with remaining jalapeños and bacon and serve.

    Cheese melted and bacon and jalapenos on top of chicken in slow cooker.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Heat it up. Enjoy spicy food? You can leave the membranes in one or a couple of the diced jalapeños to add heat to the dish.
    • Use your fingers. It’s sometimes easier to use your fingers (moistened with water) to spread the cheese mixture over the chicken. A spatula may lift the cheese more than it spreads it.
    Cooked jalapeno chicken on white plate, next to crockpot.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do I mix the cream cheese?

    If you are in a rush or your cream cheese isn’t softening up nicely, you can microwave in short bursts. Just make sure it’s the only thing in your bowl and do this step first. You don’t want it hot, just soft enough to stir in the other ingredients. A few lumps are fine as they will melt while the chicken cooks.

    Is it safe to put raw chicken in the crockpot?

    This is absolutely a safe cooking method for raw chicken! To ensure everything works well, you want to make sure the chicken is in a single layer. This will promote even cooking. Using an instant-read thermometer is the safest way to know chicken is done (you’re aiming for 165° F). This way you aren’t cutting into it, releasing juices and trying to see the color.

    Why is my chicken in the crockpot still tough?

    You may have overcooked it. Chicken breasts have so little fat it is easy for them to dry out. Covering them with our cream cheese mixture helps somewhat, but this is why using a thermometer is key. Cooking times are just a range and every slow cooker is different. Using the thermometer ensures that you stop cooking as soon as the proper temperature is reached.

    What to Serve with Jalapeño Chicken

    When serving crockpot chicken recipes that are super cheesy or saucy, I like to add in a lighter side dish. To stick with our Mexican theme, why not try a quick 3 bean salad or this elote dip!

    Looking to add more to the chicken rather than eating it alone? Try over rice, wrapped in flour tortillas, corn tortillas, or with tortilla chips. You can even turn this into a shredded chicken dip or topping.

    Storage

    This crockpot jalapeno chicken can be stored in an airtight container in your refrigerator for up to 4 days. It can also be stored in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months.

    To reheat, thaw in the fridge and reheat in a baking dish at 350° for about 15 minutes or until the chicken is completely heated through.

    More Chicken Recipes You’ll Love

    • Chicken Grilled Cheese Sandwich
      Chicken Grilled Cheese
    • Chicken and gravy on top of mashed potatoes on white plates
      Chicken and Gravy Recipe
    • Cooked chicken bites with salt, pepper and browned butter.
      Chicken Bites
    • Sliced baked chicken cutlets on white plate, next to green beans.
      Baked Chicken Cutlets

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Crockpot Jalapeno Chicken
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Crockpot Jalapeno Chicken

    Looking for comfort? Pull out the slow cooker and make this amazing Jalapeño Chicken that is perfect for an easy dinner without standing over the stove.
    Course Dinner
    Cuisine Mexican
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 3 hours hours
    Total Time 3 hours hours 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 3 servings
    Calories 725kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 3 large boneless skinless chicken breasts
    • 8 oz cream cheese cut into 1-inch cubes and softened
    • ¼ cup sour cream
    • ½ cup Colby Jack cheese shredded
    • ¾ cup Cheddar cheese shredded (divided)
    • 5 jalapenos, diced seeds and membranes removed
    • 1 jalapeno, sliced seeds and membranes removed (optional)
    • 1 teaspoon black pepper
    • 5 strips bacon cooked (divided)
    • ½ tablespoon minced garlic
    • ½ small sweet onion diced

    Instructions

    • In a large bowl, combine cream cheese, sour cream, Colby jack cheese, ½ cup cheddar cheese, garlic, and pepper until very smooth.
    • Mix in diced jalapenos and onion, and then coarsely crumble 4 bacon strips into the mix.
    • Place chicken breasts into a 6-8 quart crockpot and spread your cream cheese mixture over each chicken breast.
    • Cover your crockpot and cook on high for 3-4 hours. A meat thermometer ensures the chicken’s internal temperature is at least 165 degrees.
    • Sprinkle remaining cheddar cheese, and jalapeno slices, and crumble the last strip of bacon over the chicken breasts. Cover and let sit for about 10 minutes or until the cheese has melted.
    • Serve warm and enjoy.

    Notes

    • Serve these with rice and your favorite vegetable.
    • You can freeze leftovers and reheat in the oven.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 725kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 46g | Fat: 54g | Saturated Fat: 29g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 222mg | Sodium: 922mg | Potassium: 807mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 1981IU | Vitamin C: 38mg | Calcium: 470mg | Iron: 1mg

    Stuffed French Toast (Crispy Outside, Creamy Inside)

    October 20, 2023

    This stuffed French toast is crispy on the outside, soft and creamy on the inside, and filled with sweet cream cheese and strawberry jam. It's an easy breakfast recipe that comes together quickly but feels special enough for weekends, holidays, or when you just want something a little extra.

    A No-Fail Breakfast That Feels a Little Fancy

    If you've ever made stuffed French toast that turned soggy or fell apart in the pan, this method fixes that. With thick slices of bread, a quick dip in the custard, and a simple cream cheese filling, you get that golden, lightly crisp exterior with a warm, creamy center every time.

    Stuffed french toast slices on white plate, with strawberries.

    It's the kind of breakfast that looks impressive, tastes like something you'd order at a restaurant, but is simple enough to make at home without overthinking it.

    It’s super easy to whip up, perfect for special occasions, and lazy Sundays for a delicious breakfast recipe.

    Golden-brown French toast filled with luscious cream cheese and strawberry jam takes traditional French toast to a whole new level, similar to when we had fun making this French toast casserole.

    If you want to test out some other French toast recipes, you could try some Brioche French Toast that’s creamy and packed with flavor. Or for something more kiddo-friendly, try these EASY Cinnamon French Toast Sticks and top them with delicious blueberries. This crock pot bagel French toast is another, hands-off option.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Crispy outside, creamy inside - the texture is what makes this stand out
    • Simple ingredients - nothing complicated or hard to find
    • Quick to make - ready in about 15 minutes
    • Easy to customize - swap the jam or filling to fit what you have

    What is French Toast?

    Classic French toast, known as ‘pain perdu’ in France, is a beloved breakfast dish that’s been gracing our tables since the 5th century. It’s a culinary magic trick that transforms stale bread into a sweet and savory delight. 

    At its core, regular French toast is bread soaked in a mixture of eggs and whole milk, then fried to a yummy, golden perfection. Its fluffy interior and crispy exterior serve as a perfect canvas for a sprinkle of powdered sugar, a drizzle of maple syrup, or a dollop of your favorite fruit jam. It’s not just a breakfast option but also an opportunity to get creative in the kitchen!

    How to Keep Stuffed French Toast from Getting Soggy

    The biggest mistake when making stuffed French toast is over-soaking the bread. A quick dip is all you need. Just enough to coat the outside without saturating the center.

    Also, using thick, sturdy bread like sourdough or brioche also helps hold the filling without falling apart. For extra crispness, lightly toast the bread before assembling.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for stuffed french toast.
    • Bread – Sourdough bread is definitely the best bread for this recipe. You’ll need 16 slices for it, 2 per portion. Thick-cut bread is better than thinner bread
    • Cream cheese – You can use any cream cheese but aim for one that isn’t flavored as this can change how the French toast will taste.
    • Maple syrup – You’ll want a good quality maple syrup to add to the toast and also as one of the toppings.

    Best Bread for Stuffed French Toast

    Not all bread works the same here. You want something thick and sturdy that can handle the filling and the custard.

    • Sourdough - Slightly tangy and holds its shape well
    • Brioche - Soft, rich, and slightly sweet
    • Challah - Fluffy with a tender texture

    Avoid thin sandwich bread, as it tends to get too soft and can fall apart when cooking.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Sourdough Bread – If you can’t find sourdough bread, any kind of sturdy thick bread like challah, brioche, or French bread will do. For a healthier option, you can use whole-grain or gluten-free bread.
    • Cream Cheese – If you’re dairy-free or just want to cut some calories, a non-dairy cream cheese substitute or Greek yogurt works well.
    • Strawberry Jam – Not a fan of strawberries? Swap it out with your favorite fruit jam, like raspberry or apricot. For a less sweet option, you could use fresh fruit compote. Or simply leave out the strawberry jam entirely.
    • Vanilla Extract – No vanilla extract in the cupboard? Almond extract can provide a delightful twist. You can also use a vanilla bean; just scrape out the seeds.
    • Cinnamon – If you’re out of cinnamon, nutmeg or allspice can be a good substitute. They’ll give a different but still delicious flavor profile.
    • Maple Syrup – Honey or agave syrup can stand in for maple syrup. Or for a unique take, try a flavored syrup like blueberry or caramel. 

    Variations

    Traditional French toast is like a culinary canvas - it’s open to all sorts of delightful twists and flavor combinations! Here are a few variations you might want to try out the next time you’re in the mood for a breakfast adventure:

    • Chocolate Hazelnut Cream Cheese Delicious Stuffed French Toast: Swap the regular cream cheese for some chocolate hazelnut spread and cream cheese blend, and you’ve got yourself a Nutella lover’s dream breakfast! It’s like a deliciously decadent dessert but for breakfast. 
    • Apple Cinnamon Stuffed French Toast: Bring the flavors of fall to your breakfast table by mixing diced apples and a sprinkle of cinnamon into your cream cheese. It’s like biting into a warm, comforting apple pie - first thing in the morning!
    • Tropical Stuffed French Toast: Missing the beach? Bring a taste of the tropics right to your kitchen by filling your French toast with a cream cheese and crushed pineapple mixture. Drizzle with some coconut syrup for an extra tropical touch!
    • Berry Blast Stuffed French Toast: Instead of strawberry jam, try mixing a variety of fresh berries - like raspberries, blueberries, and blackberries - into your cream cheese for a fresh and fruity breakfast treat. 

    Remember, the best part about cooking is making it your own - so don’t be afraid to experiment with different fillings and toppings! Who knows, you might just discover a new breakfast favorite.

    How to Make Stuffed French Toast

    This French Toast is broken into 3 components:

    • Prepare the ingredients
    • Create the French Toast
    • Cook and serve

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    STEP 1: Heat the skillet. Preheat your electric skillet to 375°F (or 191°C) and apply a small amount of non-stick baking spray. Allow the skillet to warm up.

    STEP 2: Mix the cream cheese and sugar. In a medium bowl, combine the softened cream cheese, powdered sugar, and 1 teaspoon of vanilla extract. Use an electric mixer to beat the ingredients until they are fully incorporated and have a creamy texture. Set aside. (Image 1)

    Four images showing how to make stuffed french toast.

    STEP 3: Combine the eggs and milk. In a pie pan or similar shallow bowl, combine the eggs, milk, remaining vanilla extract, cinnamon, and maple syrup. Stir the mixture with a fork or small whisk until well combined. Set it aside for now. (Image 2)

    STEP 4: Pipe the filling into the bread. Using a piping bag, spoon the cream cheese mixture onto one side of the bread, about a tablespoon per piece. Top it off with a small dollop (approximately 1 tsp) of strawberry jam. Make sure there’s a slight oozing effect when cutting into it by adding enough cream cheese mixture. Repeat this process for 8 pieces of bread, ensuring each one has a cream cheese mixture and strawberry jam on one side. (Image 3)

    STEP 5: Add the jam. On the other slice of bread, create a small circle of space to ensure the jam stays on top without peeking through. Sandwich the bread together. (Image 3)

    Tip: For a crispier texture on your French toast, start by toasting the bread before spreading the cream cheese mixture in the middle and dipping it into the custard mixture. This will give your French toast a delightful crunch while maintaining the delicious flavors intact.

    STEP 6: Cover in egg mixture. Take one assembled piece of bread and dip it in the egg-milk mixture, allowing the custard to saturate the bread. Flip the bread to ensure that the egg-milk mixture covers the entire surface. Transfer it directly onto the heated skillet. Repeat this procedure for all eight pieces of assembled sourdough bread.

    A hot griddle cooking stuffed french toast.

    STEP 7: Cook the toast. On the hot skillet, cook the French toast for approximately 5 minutes on one side, then flip it over and cook for an additional 4 minutes. Aim for a golden brown color on both sides of the toast. Serve immediately. 

    STEP 8: Add toppings and serve. Add your favorite toppings – a sprinkle of powdered sugar and mixed berries. Finish it off with a drizzle of maple syrup on top.

    Cooked stuffed french toast on wooden cutting board.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Pre-toast the Bread: If you like your French toast extra crispy on the outside, try toasting your bread slices lightly before you stuff and dip them. This will give them an extra crunch that contrasts beautifully with the soft, creamy filling.
    • Customize Your Fillings: Don’t feel limited by the fillings suggested in this recipe. Feel free to get creative and use what you and your family love or what you have on hand. You can try different jams, nuts, or even chocolate chips!
    • Keep It Warm: If you’re cooking for a crowd and need to keep the first few pieces of toast warm while you finish cooking the rest, simply place them on a baking sheet in an oven set to a low temperature (about 200°F or 93°C). This will ensure everyone gets a warm, delicious piece of stuffed French toast.
    • Don’t Soak the Bread Too Long: Be careful not to leave your bread slices in the egg mixture for too long. A quick dip is all they need. If the bread soaks up too much liquid, it can become soggy and difficult to handle.
    • Experiment With Bread Types: Sourdough, challah, and brioche bread are all great options, but don’t be afraid to experiment with different types of bread. Just remember that the bread needs to be sturdy enough to hold the stuffing and withstand being dipped in the egg mixture.
    Stuffed french toast on a plate with fresh berries on top.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use non-dairy milk for the egg mixture? Question 1

    Absolutely! Almond milk, soy milk, or oat milk can all be great substitutes for dairy milk in this recipe. Keep in mind, that each may slightly alter the flavor, but your Stuffed French Toast will still be deliciously indulgent.

    What if I’m gluten intolerant?

    Don’t worry, you can still enjoy this recipe! Just switch out the regular bread for your favorite gluten-free bread. Do note that gluten-free bread can be a bit more delicate, so be extra careful when stuffing and dipping.

    Can I prepare Stuffed French Toast the night before? 

    Yes, you can! Assemble the sandwiches the night before and let them sit in the fridge overnight. Dip them in the egg mixture and cook them up fresh in the morning. Voila, breakfast is served!

    I’m not a fan of sweet fillings, any savory suggestions?

    Of course! Feel free to experiment with savory fillings like ham and cheese, or spinach and ricotta. Just adjust your toppings accordingly - think a sprinkle of herbs instead of powdered sugar.

    Do you have to use an electric skillet?

    No. If you don’t have an electric skillet, you can use a large nonstick skillet instead.

    What to Serve with Stuffed French Toast

    Stuffed French Toast is a crowd-pleaser on its own, but it can be beautifully complemented with other delightful dishes for a full breakfast feast. Here are some suggestions:

    • Fresh Fruit: A side of fresh, colorful fruit not only adds a vibrant touch to your plate but also provides a refreshing contrast to the rich French toast. Think fresh strawberries, banana slices, or a tropical fruit salad!
    • Bacon or Sausage: For meat lovers, a side of crispy bacon or savory sausage makes a perfect pairing. The saltiness of the meat balances the sweetness of the toast.
    • Scrambled Eggs: Light and fluffy scrambled eggs are a breakfast staple that pairs well with just about everything, including stuffed French toast.
    • Hash Browns: Crispy on the outside, and soft on the inside – hash browns add a lovely texture variety to your breakfast spread.
    • Yogurt: A cup of Greek yogurt can add a tangy, creamy element to your breakfast that pairs wonderfully with the sweet, stuffed French toast. Add a drizzle of honey or a handful of granola for extra flavor and crunch.

    Storage

    Storing leftover Stuffed French Toast is a breeze! Simply place the cooled leftovers in an airtight container and pop them in the refrigerator. They’ll stay fresh and delicious for up to 2-3 days. When you’re ready to enjoy them again, just reheat in a toaster oven or standard oven at a low temperature until warmed through. 

    And yes, you can absolutely freeze this dish for future indulgence! To freeze, lay your cooled leftover French Toast on a baking sheet and place it in the freezer for a couple of hours. Once each piece is individually frozen, transfer them to a freezer-safe bag or container. This method prevents the pieces from sticking together and makes it easy to take out individual servings as needed. 

    Frozen stuffed French Toast can last up to 2 months in the freezer. When you’re ready to serve, just defrost overnight in the fridge and reheat in the oven or toaster oven. Perfect for those busy mornings or when you’re craving a sweet, comforting breakfast!

    More Breakfast Recipes You’ll Love

    Looking for more ideas for a special breakfast that’s a little different? How about trying these Mini Waffle Breakfast Sandwiches for the perfect start to the day? Or if you are feeding lots of people, make a Breakfast Waffle Charcuterie Board and let everyone tuck into their favorites.

    • Blueberry dump cake, with serving spoon resting in pan.
      Blueberry Dump Cake (Easy, Buttery Dessert with Fresh Berries)
    • Cherry dump cake topped with homemade whipped cream, served in a dessert bowl.
      Cherry Dump Cake (Easy 3-Ingredient Dessert)
    • A serving of 3-ingredient dump cake in a bowl with a dollop of homemade whipped cream.
      Dump Cake Recipe (Easy 3-Ingredient Dessert That Always Works)
    • Orange upside down cake sliced on spatula.
      Orange Upside Down Cake

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Stuffed French Toast

    This stuffed French toast is filled with sweet cream cheese and jam, then cooked until golden and crispy on the outside with a soft, creamy center.
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 337kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 16 pieces sliced Sourdough Bread
    • 8 ounce block of Cream Cheese softened
    • 3 Tablespoons Strawberry Jam optional
    • 1 cup Powdered Sugar plus more for dusting (optional)
    • 2 Eggs room temperature
    • 1 ½ cups Milk
    • 2 teaspoons Vanilla Extract divided
    • ½ teaspoon Cinnamon
    • 1 Tablespoon Maple Syrup

    Instructions

    • Warm your electric skillet to 375 degrees F (or 191 degrees C). Add a small amount of non-stick baking spray to the skillet and allow the skillet to warm.
    • In a medium bowl, add the cream cheese, powdered sugar, and 1 teaspoon of vanilla extract. Using an electric mixer, beat until the ingredients are fully incorporated and are nice and creamy. Set aside.
    • In a shallow bowl like a pie pan, add the eggs, milk, rest of the vanilla extract, cinnamon, and maple syrup. Using a fork or a small whisk, stir to combine. Then set-aside.
    • Spoon the cream cheese mixture into a piping bag, and pipe about a tablespoon of cream cheese mixture to 1 side of the bread. Then add a small dollop (about 1 teaspoon) of strawberry jam on top. You'll want to add enough cream cheese mixture so there's a small amount of oozing when cutting into it. Repeat this process so 8 pieces of bread have cream cheese mixture and strawberry jam on 1 side.
    • On the other piece of bread, add a small amount in a circle so there's room for the jam to stay on top and not peek through the top.
    • Sandwich the bread together.
    • Place 1 assembled piece of bread in the egg-milk mixture, allowing the custard to soak up into the bread. Flip the bread over so the egg-milk mixture is fully coating the bread. Place it directly onto the heated skillet. Repeat this process for all 8 pieces of assembled sourdough bread.
    • Allow the French toast to cook for about 5 minutes, then flip it over and cook for 4 more minutes. **You want the French toast to become browned on each side.
    • Serve immediately.
    • Optional toppings – sprinkle with a dusting of powdered sugar and mixed berries. Drizzle maple syrup on top.

    Notes

    I used 2% milk in this recipe; any milk on hand will work. You can even use half and half.
    If you want a crunchier texture to the French toast, you’ll want to toast the bread first before adding the cream cheese mixture to the middle and dipping it into the custard mixture.
    I pipped on the cream cheese mixture to give the French toast a gooier look, but this isn’t necessary; you can spread the cream cheese mixture using a butter knife or a spoon. Being stingy with the cream cheese mixture will affect the flavor of the stuffed French toast.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 337kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 256mg | Sodium: 414mg | Potassium: 215mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 465IU | Vitamin C: 8.8mg | Calcium: 124mg | Iron: 3.2mg

    Steak Quesadilla

    October 19, 2023

    Stack of steak quesadillas.

    Skip boring old cheese quesadillas! Add steak and veggies and you’ll have the dreamiest, meatiest Steak Quesadilla that’s a filling dinner all on its own.

    An easy dinner idea like this one is great to add to the dinner rotation, especially when you want something good but want it made in less than an hour! Or, serve them as an appetizer for a fiesta, or along with a nacho bar or taco bar for friends and family!

    Steak quesadillas sliced and stacked and placed on cutting board.

    Tuesday isn’t just for crispy chicken tacos or even the best-ever beef and cheese burritos. I like to mix things up! It’s easy to meal plan that Tuesday is Mexican, but then go ahead and get creative with exactly how you interpret that!

    These steak quesadillas remind me of fajitas with peppers and onions, and I think it’s great to think of them as pre-assembled fajitas! You can also use the steak to make some amazing fajita wraps.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Amped up flavor: Use your favorite taco seasoning to add flavor to the steak.
    • Make-ahead recipe: Did you know you can freeze quesadillas? Freeze them cooked so they stay together and you’ll have a great heat and eat meal another day.
    • Perfect for picky eaters: You can mix and match fillings when griddling your quesadillas. But because a quesadilla is familiar territory, you might be able to introduce new ingredients inside.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for steak quesadilla
    • Beef – Skirt steak is the perfect cut here. You can usually get it already cut into “ribbons” at the store, so it is perfectly cut against the grain to not be too tough.
    • Cheese – Colby jack gives a great blended flavor and melts really well to hold everything together.
    • Veggies – Bell peppers and sweet onion add flavor without being overwhelming. Prefer more bite? Use red onions.
    • Tortillas – Select large burrito-size tortillas to hold everything in.
    • Taco Seasoning – I like to use this to season my meat and veggies.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Cheese – use any variety that you enjoy the taste of. I recommend cheddar, Colby, or Monterey Jack for their great melting capabilities!
    • Meat – feel free to use diced chicken or even shrimp. Flank steak is another option if you can’t find skirt steak.

    Variations

    Instead of folding each tortilla in half, you could spread the filling over the entire tortilla and top it with another tortilla to make a large quesadilla. When I do it this way, I like to double the filling in each. So you would be getting 3 large quesadillas instead of 6 smaller ones.

    Equipment

    You can use 1 or 2 skillets here – either make the filling then place it in a large bowl and wipe out the skillet to reuse, or you can just leave the filling in the skillet and use a second one to cook the quesadillas.

    How to Make Skirt Steak Quesadillas

    A quesadilla dinner is only a few steps away:

    • make the filling
    • cook up quesadillas
    • add all the fun toppings!

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Steps 1-4 of how to make steak quesadilla.

    STEP 1. Slice the veggies. Slice the veggies and heat them up with the garlic until just softened (Image 1).

    Tip: Slice the veggies all the same size, as well as being similar to the steak. This way everything will cook evenly and will also give you the perfect filling ratio.

    STEP 2. Cook the steak. Cook the steak quickly over high heat, then add the taco seasoning and water. Stir in the veggies so everything is coated in seasoning (Image 2).

    STEP 3. Layer it up. In a clean skillet, add a tortilla and place filling and cheese on one half (Image 3).

    STEP 4. Cook and flip. Carefully fold the tortilla in half and flip over to finish cooking and seal everything in (Image 4).

    Steak quesadillas, sliced on a wooden cutting board.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Cook filling first. Make sure your veggies are cooked to your preferred texture and the steak to your favorite doneness. The quesadilla is only cooked long enough to melt the cheese, and you won’t be able to cook the other ingredients from raw.
    • Better your knife skills. Try and slice all the veggies the same size so they cook evenly. The same goes for the steak.
    Showing close up of inside of steak quesadilla.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you make a quesadilla without it falling apart?

    I find that using a single tortilla folded will keep the fillings inside better! This gives you less area for filling to escape, and you can use that edge to help flip the quesadilla over. Also making sure that the cheese is melted before flipping will “glue” things together.

    What cheese is best for quesadillas?

    Cheddar, Colby, and Monterey Jack are all really great melting cheeses and will hold everything together as well as give you a great cheese pull. To add more traditional flavor, try combining some oaxaca or chihuahua with your cheddar.

    What should I put in a quesadilla?

    The cheese is obvious, but then you’ll want to add some more protein to “beef” it up, whether that is beef, chicken, or beans. Peppers and onions are classic, and I used bell peppers to appeal to the most people, but you can use spicier options like poblano or jalapeño. Make it vegetarian by using black beans with cubed, cooked sweet potato.

    How to fancy up a quesadilla?

    Try adding some cheese in the pan on the outside of your tortilla for extra color and texture. Use multiple colors of peppers to add a visual flair. Get creative with your toppings such as lime crema.

    What to Serve with Steak Quesadillas

    I love to add a whole spread to make a meal. While the quesadilla can be filling on its own with yummy toppings, you can make it serve more people by adding sides. A great taco dip isn’t only for game day! Add even more protein with a 3 Bean Salad, and my elote dip is also really popular.

    Steak quesadilla slices sitting next to salsa.

    Storage

    One option is to prepare the whole recipe from start to finish and freeze the quesadillas (see below). Alternatively, you can prepare the individual components (just the sautéed veggies and beef), freeze them separately, and, when the hankering strikes, assemble and cook the quesadillas for a fresher finished product. 

    • Refrigerator. Once the quesadillas have cooled completely, seal them in an airtight container or a large Ziplock and store them in the freezer for up to 4 days. 
    • Freezer. Allow the quesadillas to cool to room temperature before sealing them in a large Ziplock bag and storing them in the Freezer. They will stay good for up to 3 months. Allow them to thaw in the fridge before reheating. 
    • To reheat. Arrange the quesadillas in a single layer on a baking sheet lined with aluminum foil, cover them with more aluminum foil, and bake at 350°F for 10 minutes or until heated through. You could also pop a quesadilla in the microwave. Heat in 30-second intervals until warm. 

    More Steak Recipes You’ll Love

    • Crock Pot cube steak on top of mashed potatoes, sitting on white plate.
      Crock Pot Cube Steak
    • Oven Baked Steak with Butter and a side of potatoes
      How to Cook Steak in the Oven
    • steak bites in white dish with butter on top
      The BEST Steak Bites
    • Cracker Barrel country fried steak on black plate, next to green beans and biscuits.
      Cracker Barrel Country Fried Steak

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Stack of steak quesadillas.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Steak Quesadilla

    Steak quesadillas are like steak fajitas and quesadillas, in one! Tender steak, cheeses, peppers and a few other ingredients make these so full of flavor!
    Course Appetizer, Dinner
    Cuisine American, Mexican
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 40 minutes minutes
    Total Time 50 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 quesadillas
    Calories 615kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    For the quesadillas

    • 2 ½ tablespoons olive oil
    • 2 pounds skirt steak thinly sliced
    • 1 packet taco seasoning
    • 3 tablespoons water
    • 1 red bell pepper sliced
    • 1 green bell pepper sliced
    • 1 small sweet onion sliced
    • 1 tablespoon minced garlic
    • 1 cup shredded Colby Jack cheese
    • 3 tablespoons olive oil divided
    • 6 large flour tortillas

    To serve

    • 1 cup salsa We love this Rotel Salsa recipe.
    • 1 cup guacamole
    • 1 cup sour cream
    • Fresh cilantro
    • Limes

    Instructions

    • Sauté the veggies. Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large heavy bottom skillet and add the bell peppers and onion. Sauté until the onion becomes translucent and slightly caramelized. Add the garlic and sauté until fragrant. Remove from the heat and set aside.
    • Cook the steak. Heat 1 ½ tablespoons of olive oil in that same skillet over medium-high heat and add the skirt steak. Sauté until cooked to your preferred level of doneness and then add the taco seasoning and water. Combine well and then add the sauteed veggies to the steak and give it a good stir.
    • Fill the tortilla. Place a tortilla into a clean skillet over medium heat and add ¼ cup of the steak, ¼ cup of the sauteed veggies mixture, and a handful of the cheese to one side of the tortilla. Give the tortilla about 30 seconds to toast and then fold the the empty half of the tortilla over to close all of the ingredients inside.
    • Cook the quesadilla. Allow the quesadilla to cook for a couple of minutes before flipping and cooking for an additional couple of minutes or until the cheese has melted and the tortilla is golden brown.
    • Repeat. Repeat steps 3 and 4 with the remaining ingredients.
    • Serve. Slice the quesadillas into triangles and serve topped with salsa, guac, sour cream, cilantro, and lime.

    Notes

    • Nutrition information is for quesadilla only, without toppings.
    • Try chicken if you don’t have steak on hand.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1quesadilla | Calories: 615kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 43g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 116mg | Sodium: 1056mg | Potassium: 676mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1473IU | Vitamin C: 47mg | Calcium: 246mg | Iron: 5mg

    Frito Chicken Casserole

    October 17, 2023

    Frito chicken casserole being lifted out of baking dish.

    This Frito Chicken Casserole is like giving yourself permission to eat a hearty chicken dip for dinner! The chicken, cheese, peppers, and salty chips melt together and feel like a treat, but it’s really an easy casserole recipe for a great dinner idea! This walking taco casserole recipe is a similar version, using ground beef.

    Anytime we can use corn chips in a recipe, like in this Frito Chili Pie or in this Buffalo Chicken Soup, it’s a win! So count this Frito casserole in with our other favorite comfort foods, for sure!

    Spatula lifting Frito chicken casserole out of baking dish.

    Sometimes people see the word “casserole” and groan. Well, this Frito chicken recipe isn’t your mom’s casserole dish! Much like my favorite Doritos chicken casserole, the flavors are elevated here. I also enjoy using new carb combinations in my casserole, so check out a fun stuffing chicken casserole, too.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Fun to eat: If you scoop corn chips, you can eat them like a dip! Otherwise, use smaller chips or crush them to eat with a fork.
    • Convenient: Use pantry items to make this when you’re in a rush.
    • Adjust the heat: Make this Frito casserole as mild or spicy as you like, either with mix-ins or toppings.

    Ingredients for Frito Chicken Casserole

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for Frito chicken casserole recipe.
    • Chicken – Make sure and cook your chicken so it is easy to shred, such as in your slow cooker. This is also a great recipe to use up leftovers!
    • Canned soup – I use one can of cream of mushroom and one cream of chicken. You can always swap in other cans of cream soup if that’s what you have on hand.
    • Sour cream – Will help thin out the soup to a creamy consistency.
    • Cheese – Colby Jack is my favorite for a Mexican-inspired dish but reach for anything you have or any combo, including taco-seasoned cheese or sharp cheddar.
    • Corn – Pick up canned or frozen kernels.
    • Black beans – Use about half a can here and save the rest to add to quick lunch salads.
    • Milk – After making this again and again, I’ve realized that milk is no longer necessary in this recipe. You can use it if you like, but I find that it’s creamy enough without it.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Chicken – short on time? Bring home a rotisserie chicken and shred it up while the oven preheats. You can also dice up leftover Thanksgiving turkey here or use slow cooker shredded chicken that you made in advance!
    • Corn – if you don’t like the taste of canned corn, you can easily use frozen instead. Or go the other way and cook corn on the cob and cut the corn kernels off.
    • Beans – often cook beans from dried? Use those instead of a can.

    How to Make Chicken Frito Pie

    Frito casserole with cream of chicken soup couldn’t be easier. We use one bowl to mix everything up before spreading it in a baking dish.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Steps 1-4 of how to make Frito Chicken Casserole.

    STEP 1. Begin combining. Add soup, chicken, sour cream, tomatoes, and seasoning to a large bowl (Image 1).

    STEP 2. Add color. Stir corn and black beans into the bowl (Image 2). Make sure everything is well combined.

    Tip: If using canned corn and beans, be sure and drain very well so the mixture isn’t watery.

    STEP 3. Fill the dish. Spread the chicken mixture evenly into a casserole or baking dish (Image 3). Top with large scooping corn chips (Image 4).

    Shredded cheese on top of Frito chicken casserole.

    STEP 5. Say cheese! Spread shredded cheese evenly over the entire casserole and bake until hot and bubbly!

    Baked Frito Chicken Casserole in white baking dish.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Use scooping corn chips. Look for name brand “Scoops” for a great dipping experience. It’s so fun to eat this casserole like a dip! If you prefer, you can use regular corn chips whole or crushed.
    • Heat things up. If you like spicy food, you can stir in jalapeños, hot sauce, or cayenne pepper to the mixing bowl. These can also be added on top of individual servings.

    Recipe FAQs

    What side dishes go with Frito chicken casserole?

    I think the reigning classic casserole side dish is a fresh green salad. Having this nice cool dish (maybe this jalapeno ranch dressing?) is a great contrast to the hot casserole. I also love to add any green veggie on the side if you prefer something warm, such as peas or roasted broccoli.

    What are 5 components of a casserole?

    Did you know that a casserole consists of 5 main parts? Protein, starch, vegetable, sauce, and cheese. The sauce holds the protein, starch, and veggies together, and then cheese is the finishing touch.

    How do you make a casserole taste better?

    I aim for heat, seasoning, and crunch. A big mistake that is made is combining a bunch of bland ingredients and cooking until they are mush. This is what makes people groan about casseroles! But if you level it up with great flavors and a nice crunchy topping, it will become a family favorite.

    Frito chicken casserole serving on a white plate.

    Storage

    Leftovers of this Frito Chicken casserole will keep in the fridge for up to 3 days in an airtight container. Reheat in the microwave or oven, keeping in mind that the chips will lose their crunch. You can also reheat the filling and add fresh chips for scooping when you serve.

    More Casserole Recipes You’ll Love

    If you love similar casserole recipes, don’t skip this taquito chicken casserole too! It’s 5 ingredients, and ready in under 30 minutes!

    • Ham Casserole
      Ham Casserole – Swiss Cheese + Noodle Bake
    • Taco Chicken Casserole on a plate.
      Taco Chicken Casserole
    • Serving of John Wayne Casserole on a white plate.
      John Wayne Casserole
    • doritos chicken casserole on plate
      Doritos Chicken Casserole

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Frito chicken casserole being lifted out of baking dish.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Frito Chicken Casserole

    This Frito Chicken Casserole is like giving yourself permission to eat chicken dip for dinner! Everything melts together and feels like a treat.
    Course Dinner
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 35 minutes minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 662kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 3 cups shredded cooked chicken
    • 1 can cream of mushroom soup
    • 1 can cream of chicken soup
    • 1 can diced tomatoes and green chilies drained
    • 1 cup sour cream
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
    • ½ teaspoon onion powder
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 1 cup canned corn drained
    • 1 cup canned black beans drained and rinsed
    • 2 cups dipping corn chips
    • 2 cups shredded Colby Jack cheese

    Instructions

    • Preheat your oven to 375°F. Spray a 9X13 inch baking dish with cooking spray; set aside.
    • In a large mixing bowl, combine the shredded chicken, cream of mushroom, soup, cream of chicken soup, diced tomatoes and green chilies, sour cream, garlic powder, onion powder, and salt. Mix well.
    • Add the corn, and black beans to the chicken mixture. Mix well.
    • Transfer the chicken mixture to prepared baking dish. Spread it evenly.
    • Place the corn chips on top of the chicken mixture, covering it evenly.
    • Sprinkle the shredded cheese on top of the corn chips.
    • Bake the casserole in the preheated oven for 25 minutes, or until the cheese is melted and bubbly.

    Video

    Notes

    • To save time, you can use store-bought rotisserie chicken for this recipe. Simply shred the chicken into bite-sized pieces using your hands or a fork.
    • If you like your casserole a little bit spicy, you can add some jalapeños, hot sauce or cayenne pepper to the chicken mixture.
    • We prefer using the larger-sized corn chips, commonly used for dipping, as a topping for this casserole. This way, we can easily grab a chip and use it to scoop up the delicious chicken mixture for a satisfying bite.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 662kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 37g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 17g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 124mg | Sodium: 1552mg | Potassium: 654mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 887IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 437mg | Iron: 4mg

    Pumpkin Cheesecake Bites

    October 16, 2023

    Pumpkin Cheesecake Bites on wooden cutting board.

    Pumpkin Cheesecake Bites: There is no dessert more “fall” than pumpkin pie and these deliciously bite-sized pumpkin cheesecake bites will give your traditional pumpkin pie a run for its money!

    Halloween and Thanksgiving are two holidays where pumpkin seems to be the star of the show, so we wanted to make sure you were fully prepared with all things pumpkin, and this pumpkin cheesecake recipe will fit the bill!

    Post originally created in December 2015, and republished and updated in October 2023, with a new recipe.

    Pumpkin cheesecake bites on wooden cutting board.

    Can’t get enough of fall pumpkin desserts? Me either. I think you’d love these Pumpkin Cheesecake Bars as well as this Pumpkin Poke Cake!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • It uses easy-to-find ingredients: All of the ingredients listed for this perfect fall dessert recipe are easy to find and you might already have most of them in your pantry!
    • New take on a classic: These pumpkin bites pack in all of the flavors of traditional pumpkin pie into a delicious bite-sized serving with a yummy classic graham cracker crust.
    • Topped to perfection: Top these delicious cheesecake bites with whipped cream and caramel for a yummy treat.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for pumpkin cheesecake bites.
    • Canned Pumpkin – We suggest traditional canned pumpkin puree for this recipe.
    • Pumpkin Pie Spice Extract – This is what really brings that pumpkin flavor to these yummy pumpkin cheesecake bites.
    • Sour Cream – The combination of cream cheese and sour cream is what makes for a luxe cheesecake flavor.
    • Cream Cheese – Using room-temperature cream cheese will make the process so much easier. If the cream cheese is chilled I recommend beating the cream cheese for a few minutes before adding the brown sugar.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Pumpkin Pie Extract – If you cannot find this ingredient, feel free to skip it. If you do not have pumpkin pie spice extract, increase the amount of pumpkin pie spice to 1 tsp.
    • Vanilla Powder – The vanilla bean powder can be left out, the powder gives the cheesecake an added vanilla flavor you can double the amount of vanilla extract. Again, if you cannot find this ingredient, feel free to skip it.
    • Butter – I use unsalted butter, you can substitute salted butter or margarine. If using, reduce the salt by half.

    Variations

    I used a standard-sized cupcake pan for this recipe, you can use a mini cupcake pan. Reduce the baking time to 15-20 minutes.

    Also, if you’d like, you could turn this recipe into a large single cheesecake instead of bites. Instead of the muffin tin, use a large springform pan or 9-inch cake pan for the cheesecake shape!

    How to Make Pumpkin Cheesecake Bites

    Making this mini pumpkin cheesecake recipe is so easy.

    These Pumpkin Cheesecake Bites are broken into 3 components:

    • making the crust
    • making the cheesecake filling
    • baking to perfection

    We suggest making this recipe ahead of time as it does need to set for 2 hours after baking, so keep that in mind!

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    First up, grease and line a mini cupcake pan with mini cupcake papers, and then preheat the oven to 350 degrees. Now to make the crust!

    Collage of steps 1-3 for making mini pumpkin cheesecakes.

    STEP 1. Crush the graham crackers. Add the graham crackers to the bowl of your food processor, and pulse to slightly break up the graham crackers to become graham cracker crumbs.  (Image 1).

    Tip: If you do not have a food processor, do not worry! You can also throw the Grahams into a plastic bag and crush them with a rolling pin.

    STEP 2. Combine. Add the brown sugar, salt, and butter and pulse until the graham crackers are coarse crumbs. (Image 2).

    Tip: If you are not using a food processor, add the graham crackers to a large bowl and mix together with the above ingredients.

    STEP 3. Form and Bake. Add a small amount of the graham cracker mixture to the cupcake pan. It's about 2 tablespoons if using a standard-size muffin pan or about 2 tablespoons if you're using a mini muffin pan. (Image 3).

    Using a measuring cup or your fingers, press them down so the crumbs are packed down and secure. **If they're not packed down enough the crust will crumble when baked. Bake at 350 degrees for 8 minutes.

    Steps 4-7 of how to make pumpkin cheesecake bites.

    STEP 4. Start the Cream Cheese Mixture. While the crusts are baking add the cream cheese and brown sugar to a bowl and using an electric hand mixer beat until it's light and fluffy, about 3 minutes. You could also use a stand mixer. (Image 4).

    STEP 5. Continue the Cheesecake Filling. Add the pumpkin, sour cream, and salt. Beat until well combined making sure to scrape down the sides of the bowl so all of the ingredients are well incorporated. (Image 5).

    STEP 6. Finish Up the Filling. Add in the egg, vanilla, vanilla powder, pumpkin pie spice extract, cinnamon, and pumpkin pie spice. Beat well so all of the ingredients are well combined. (Image 6).

    STEP 7. Distribute Into Cups. Evenly distribute the pumpkin pie cheesecake filling onto each of the crust-lined cups. (Image 7).

    STEP 8. Bake Pumpkin Cheesecake Bites. Place the muffin tray on a baking sheet with some water (this will act as your water bath). Bake cheesecakes at 350 degrees for 25-30 minutes or until the cheesecake has set completely.

    STEP 9. Cool. Allow them to cool for about 45 minutes then refrigerate for 2 hours or until overnight.

    Baked pumpkin cheesecake bites in muffin pan.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Allow to fully cool and set. This recipe is best after cooling and chilling for 2 hours.
    • Correct temperature. Make sure that the cream cheese is at room temperature and soft for this recipe to turn out.
    Baked pumpkin cheesecake bites on wooden cutting board.

    Recipe FAQs

    How to prevent cheesecake from cracking?

    I tested this recipe by baking the cheesecakes without a water bath and cracking did happen! Make sure to bake them using a water bath. That's as simple as adding water to a baking sheet and placing the muffin tin on top.

    How to make pumpkin pie seasoning?

    To make pumpkin spice seasoning, all you have to do is combine ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, ground ginger, allspice, and cloves in a bowl.

    What to top pumpkin cheesecake with?

    You can top your mini pumpkin cheesecakes with a variety of delicious options, such as whipped cream, caramel sauce, chopped candied pecans, a dusting of cinnamon, or even a drizzle of melted white chocolate for an extra touch of sweetness.

    Do I have to use cupcake liners for mini cheesecakes?

    Using cupcake liners makes it much easier to remove and I really recommend using them.

    What is the secret to the best cheesecake?

    To make the best cheesecake, start with a graham cracker crust, blend a creamy and well-seasoned cheesecake filling, bake it in a water bath for a perfectly smooth texture, and allow it to chill thoroughly in the fridge before serving. The water bath is what prevents cracking!

    Can I make these ahead of time?

    You can make these ahead of time up to 3 days ahead of time. Be sure to not top them with whipped cream or caramel until you're ready to serve them.

    What to Serve with This Pumpkin Mini Cheesecake Recipe

    This Creamy Cheesecake Bites Recipe goes well with even more pumpkin deliciousness. Try out this Pumpkin Fluff recipe for a yummy topping!

    Pumpkin cheesecake bite on white plate.

    Storage

    Store the mini cheesecakes in the fridge covered with as much of the air removed from them in plastic wrap for up to 4 days.

    To freeze, place in a freezer-safe, airtight container, labeled for up to 3 months. Allow them to thaw at room temperature before serving.

    More Pumpkin Recipes You’ll Love

    Pumpkin recipes will give you that fall feel year-round. Here are some yummy pumpkin-y treats that will bring fall to your kitchen!

    • Close up of pumpkin streusel muffins stacked on top of one another
      Pumpkin Streusel Muffins
    • Sweet and spicy pumpkin seeds in a white bowl.
      Sweet and Spicy Pumpkin Seeds
    • A pan of frosted brownies are topped with strawberries dipped in orange chocolate to look like pumpkins
      Pumpkin Patch Brownies with Strawberry Pumpkins
    • Baked pumpkin bread on cutting board.
      Easy Pumpkin Bread Recipe

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    If you’re looking for more of a traditional cheesecake recipe, then you’ll also love this strawberry crunch cheesecake that has become a household favorite!

    Recipe

    Pumpkin Cheesecake Bites on wooden cutting board.
    Print Pin
    5 from 7 votes

    Pumpkin Cheesecake Bites

    Pumpkin cheesecake bites are a deliciously easy pumpkin dessert that packs in yummy fall flavor all in the palm of your hand.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 12 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 28 minutes minutes
    Chilling Time 2 hours hours
    Total Time 2 hours hours 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 cheesecakes
    Calories 146kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Graham Cracker Crust

    • 1 sleeve graham crackers
    • ¼ cup brown sugar packed
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • 4 tablespoon unsalted butter melted

    Cheesecake Filling

    • 8 ounces cream cheese softened
    • ½ cup brown sugar packed
    • ½ cup canned pumpkin not pumpkin pie mix
    • 1 tablespoon sour cream
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • 1 egg room temperature
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla powder optional
    • 1 teaspoon pumpkin pie spice extract optional
    • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
    • ½ teaspoon pumpkin pie spice

    Toppings

    • whipped cream (optional)
    • caramel sauce (optional)

    Instructions

    • Grease and line a mini cupcake pan with mini cupcake papers
    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees.
    • Add the graham crackers to the bowl of your food processor, pulse to slightly break up the graham cracker.
    • Add the brown sugar, salt, and melted butter and pulse until the graham crackers are coarse crumbs.
    • Add a small amount of the graham cracker mixture to the cupcake pan. It's about 2 tablespoon if using a standard size muffin pan or about 2 tps if you're using a mini muffin pan.
    • Using a measuring cup or your fingers, press them down so the crumbs are packed down and secure. **If they're not packed down enough the crust will crumble when baked.
    • Bake the sweet graham cracker crust at 350 degrees for 8 minutes.
    • While the crusts are baking add the cream cheese and brown sugar to a bowl and using an electric mixture beat until it's light and fluffy, about 3 minutes.
    • Add the pumpkin, sour cream, and salt. Beat until well combined making sure to scrape down the sides of the bowl so all of the ingredients are well incorporated.
    • Add in the egg, vanilla, vanilla powder, pumpkin pie spice extract, cinnamon, and pumpkin pie spice. Beat well so all of the ingredients are well combined.
    • Evenly distribute the cheesecake filling onto each of the crust-lined cups.
    • Place the muffin tray on a baking sheet with some water (this will act as your water bath).
    • Bake at 350 degrees for 25-30 minutes or until the cheesecake has set completely.
    • Allow them to cool for about 45 minutes then refrigerate for 2 hours or until overnight.
    • Top with whipped cream, whipped topping, or caramel and freshly grated nutmeg.

    Notes

    • I used a standard sized cupcake pan for this recipe, you can use a mini cupcake pan. Reduce the baking time to 15-20 minutes.
    • Using cupcake liners makes removing it much easier, and I recommend using them.
    • I use unsalted butter, you can substitute salted butter or margarine. If using, reduce the salt by half.
    • Using room-temperature cream cheese will make the process so much easier. If the cream cheese is chilled I recommend beating the cream cheese for a few minutes before adding the brown sugar.
    • The vanilla bean powder can be left out, the powder gives the cheesecake an added vanilla flavor you can double the amount of vanilla extract
    • If you do not have pumpkin pie spice extract, increase the amount of pumpkin pie spice to 1 tsp.
    • Wait to top the mini cheesecakes with whipped cream and caramel until you're ready to serve them.
    I tested this recipe baking the cheesecakes without a water bath and cracking did happen! Make sure to bake them using a water bath. That's as simple as adding water on a baking sheet and placing the muffin tin on top.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cheesecake bite | Calories: 146kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 24mg | Sodium: 169mg | Potassium: 70mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 1732IU | Vitamin C: 0.5mg | Calcium: 28mg | Iron: 1mg

    Slow Cooker Cabbage

    October 15, 2023

    Close up of cooked cabbage from the slow cooker in a spoon.

    Slow Cooker Cabbage: Did you know that you can make a slow cooker cabbage using only a few simple ingredients? This is a delicious comfort food slow cooker recipe that you can toss in, in the late afternoon and enjoy with some nice Italian bread a few hours later. This will soon become one of your favorite side dishes or even main dishes, for sure!

    Cooked cabbage on a serving spoon, over the slow cooker.

    Big fan of easy, simple ingredient slow cooker meals? I think you’d love these Slow Cooker Drumsticks or this Cherry Coca-Cola Pulled Pork.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • It uses a few ingredients: With only a few simple ingredients, this recipe is one of the most budget-friendly and easiest crockpot cabbage recipes!
    • Simple recipe: This is one of the easiest crockpot cabbage recipes in that it comes together in three easy steps that require nearly no work at all. It truly is the best recipe!
    • Ready in only 2 hours: Talk about a fast slow cooker dinner option or even side dish pairing!

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients on counter for slow cooker cabbage.
    • Chicken Broth – We used a reduced-sodium chicken broth for this slow cooker recipe. Or, you can make my homemade chicken broth recipe.
    • Green Cabbage – You’re going to use a whole head of cabbage for this recipe. Pick one of good size and it’ll yield some super tender cabbage!
    • Seasonings – We recommend salt and black pepper for this recipe, but you could easily dress it up with some more of your favorite seasonings. Some garlic and onion powder or Italian seasoning might add some delicious flavor to this cabbage dish!

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Chicken Broth – Feel free to use a broth of your preference for this recipe (like beef broth for example). If you are vegetarian or vegan, vegetable broth can easily replace the called-for chicken broth.
    • Cabbage – You could opt for red cabbage for this slow cooking recipe instead of the called-for green cabbage. Keep in mind that the flavors will vary.

    Variations

    You can easily change up this recipe by cooking it differently or by adding some additional ingredients.

    • Cook Method – This recipe can also be made on the stove. Simply follow the same directions, add everything to a large pot on the stove, cover, and cook on low heat for 2 hours.
    • Extras – Want to add some more to this basic cabbage soup recipe? Some kielbasa slices, bacon, ground beef, or potatoes are some different ways to make a yummy dinner out of this recipe. You could also add some chopped onion to give it some more flavor.

    Equipment

    A slow cooker is required for this recipe.

    How to Make Slow Cooker Cabbage

    Making slow-cooker cabbage is extremely simple.

    This Cabbage Soup is broken into 3 components:

    • chopping the cabbage
    • dumping everything into the crock pot
    • slow cooking time

    We suggest eating this cabbage soup right away, so make sure to time the cooking time with your dinner time accordingly!

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Steps 1-4 of making slow cooker cabbage.

    STEP 1. Chop the cabbage. Chop cabbage in to bite-size pieces. (Image 1).

    Tip: Keep in mind that the size of the cabbage chunks will be the size you end up eating. I chopped the cabbage up into about ½ cube sizes.

    STEP 2. Add to the slow cooker. Place in slow cooker and add chicken broth. (Image 2).

    Cooked cut up cabbage in slow cooker.

    STEP 3. Add butter. Slice butter into small squares and place on top of cabbage, and then add salt and pepper according to taste. (Just remember that you can always add more after but it's hard to take it away after.) (Image 3).

    STEP 4. Cook. Add salt and pepper then cook on high for 2 hours. Can do 2.5 to 3 hours if you want softer. (Image 4).

    Cooked cabbage in a small white bowl.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Enjoy right away. This crock pot cabbage recipe is best served warm and right away.
    • Overcooking. If the cabbage cooks too long, it can become mushy, so if you prefer your cabbage to have more texture, watch the cooking time as all slow cookers can cook differently.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can you cook cabbage too long?

    Yes, you can. Cooking it too long and make it become mushy.

    Do you soak cabbage before cooking?

    No, you do not have to soak cabbage before cooking.

    How long to cook cabbage in the slow cooker?

    We suggest 2-2.5 hours for the perfect texture.

    What to Serve with Slow Cooker Cabbage

    This recipe can be a main dish or side dish. It pairs well with some yummy and fresh warm bread or white rice.

    This cabbage recipe could also be a great side to some beef brisket or sliced keilbasa sausage, like we did with our Instant Pot Cabbage and Kielbasa!

    Storage

    If you have leftover cabbage, allow it to fully cool and store in an airtight container and place in the refrigerator. Enjoy within 3-4 days.

    More Slow Cooker Recipes You’ll Love

    If you are a big fan of easy-to-make slow cooker recipes, I think you will become obsessed with the ones below.

    If you’re a fan of cabbage, make sure to try this red cabbage soup too!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Close up of cooked cabbage from the slow cooker in a spoon.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Slow Cooker Cabbage

    Slow cooker cabbage is a great and simple crock pot dinner idea or side dish that's full of flavor! Perfect for serving alone or to add chicken or sausage to!
    Course Dinner
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 2 hours hours 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 2 hours hours 35 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 Servings
    Calories 162kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 4 tablespoons butter
    • 1 can chicken broth 14.5 oz can
    • 1 head of cabbage
    • salt and pepper to taste Just remember that you can always add more after but it's hard to take it away after.

    Instructions

    • Chop cabbage in to bite-size pieces.
    • Place in slow cooker and add chicken broth.
    • Slice butter in to small squares and place on top of cabbage, and then add salt and pepper according to taste. (Just remember that you can always add more after but it's hard to take it away after.)
    • Cook on high for 2 hours. Can do 2.5 to 3 hours if you want softer.

    Video

    Notes

    Remember that cooking the cabbage too long can create a mushy texture so keep an eye on your cabbage, as all slow-cookers can cook at different power levels.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 162kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 32mg | Sodium: 409mg | Potassium: 403mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 574IU | Vitamin C: 83mg | Calcium: 97mg | Iron: 1mg

    Pecan Pie Recipe

    October 13, 2023

    A slice of pecan pie on a white plate, with pecans sprinkled beside it.

    Our pecan pie recipe is not only easy to make but the extra addition of cinnamon gives the perfect flavor of fall or the touch of holiday spice. One of the most traditional pie recipes that we have, this will be perfect for your Thanksgiving table or your Christmas dinner.

    Paired with a store-bought pie crust to speed things up, or with our delicious, buttery pie crust recipe, this pecan pie will become your new favorite dessert!

    Baked pecan pie sitting on cooling rack.

    During the holidays, you can more than likely count on finding this peanut butter pie and these 7 layer bars on the dessert table, next to pecan pie.

    But no matter what is sitting next to this pecan pie recipe, it will be a top favorite for your guests!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • The cinnamon touch: A lot of pecan pie recipes don’t use cinnamon and we love the touch it adds to this recipe! It gives it the perfect flavor of fall, or even taste of the holidays.
    • Make-ahead recipe: If making this for the holidays, make this ahead of time so you don’t have to worry about it on the day of.
    • Simple ingredients: A pecan pie recipe may sound intimidating but it’s not. This recipe is really easy to make but so full of flavor.

    Ingredients Needed

    The ingredients needed for this recipe are really simple and you may even have most of them on hand already!

    Labeled ingredients for pecan pie recipe.

    Ingredient Notes and Substitutions:

    • Pie crust – To keep things really simple, you can use a store-bought pie crust, or if you prefer a homemade crust, this buttery crust recipe is always a great choice! If using store-bought crust, you can make these pie crust cookies with the second crust that comes in the package.
    • Corn syrup – We used light corn syrup in this recipe but feel free to use dark corn syrup if you prefer. It comes out delicious either way.
    • Sugars – we do white sugar and brown sugar for this recipe to give it a bit of a “twist” in flavor. However if you prefer to use just one cup of white sugar, instead of brown sugar, that works too.
    • Pecans – I usually buy the halved pecans so I can use some of them to sprinkle on the top for looks. So then I’ll chop them myself when putting them in to the pie. You can also leave them all halved, instead of chopping if you prefer.

    Equipment

    We use a 9-inch pie plate to make this recipe. This buttermilk pie recipe is another vintage dessert that you can make to serve during the holidays.

    How to Make Pecan Pie

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    First, preheat your oven to 350 degrees F. and remove pie crust from the refrigerator.

    TIP: Place a rimmed cookie sheet on the bottom shelf of the oven so it will catch any spillage that may take place during baking.

    Steps 1-4 of how to make pecan pie.

    STEP 1. Prep the batter. In a large mixing bowl, mix together the eggs, sugars, vanilla, cinnamon, corn syrup and butter until evenly combined.

    STEP 2. Add pecans. Next, add in the chopped pecans and stir to combine.

    Tip: You’ll want to stir this again just before pouring in to pie crust so the pecans are mixed together well with the batter.

    STEP 3. Pie crust. Unroll pie crust and place and gently press in to in a 9-inch pie plate, pinching the sides (optional) to form a “wall” for the pecan pie filling. Make sure the pie crust is evenly spread over the pie plate, for best results.

    STEP 4. Add filling. When pie crust is arranged in to pie plate, pour pecan pie filling in to the crust.

    Whole, baked pecan pie on a cooling rack.

    STEP 5. Bake. Gently move pecan pie to the oven, place on the rimmed baking sheet, and bake at 350 degrees for 60 minutes or until the middle springs back when lightly touched.

    STEP 6. Cool. All the pecan pie to cool for at least 2 hours before serving.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Allow to fully cool. Placing the baked pie on a cooling rack will help it cool faster and more evenly.
    • Altitude. The altitude can make this pie bake differently. You may find that it needs longer to to bake, so keeping an eye on it is best when making it for the first time so you’ll know for the future.
    • Prevent crust from burning. Sometimes the oven can cook the crust too fast, before the pie is done. If you notice the pie crust getting too brown, cover the crust edges with pieces of foil or use a pie shield.
    Slice of pecan pie on a white plate.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is the filling made of in pecan pie?

    We use eggs, corn syrup, cinnamon, vanilla, butter, white sugar, brown sugar, and pecans.

    How do you make pecan pie crust not soggy?

    Although we don’t find that our crust gets soggy with this recipe, if you want to, you can whip an egg white and brush it on the crust before pouring the filling in.

    Can I use light corn syrup instead of dark for pecan pie?

    Absolutely! We’ve used dark and light corn syrup, interchangeably and it turns out great every time.

    Slice of pecan pie on a white plate.

    Storage

    After pecan pie has fully cooled, it’s best to store the pie in the refrigerator until ready to serve.

    More Holiday Recipes You’ll Love

    If you love making desserts for the holidays, you’ll also love these top favorites:

    • Cherry bread with cherry icing on wooden cutting board.
      Cherry Bread with Cherry Glaze
    • A collage of old-fashioned dessert recipes
      Old-Fashioned Desserts Everyone Knows and Loves
    • Hot fudge sauce dripping from spoon in to bowl.
      Hot Fudge Sauce Recipe
    • Strawberry Bread loaf with Strawberry Icing, dripping down the side.
      Strawberry Bread with Strawberry Icing

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    A slice of pecan pie on a white plate, with pecans sprinkled beside it.
    Print Pin
    4.75 from 4 votes

    Pecan Pie Recipe

    This easy pecan pie recipe uses a touch of cinnamon to give it the perfect fall flavor or holiday spice that you're looking for!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 1 hour hour
    Total Time 1 hour hour 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 303kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup white sugar
    • ½ cup brown sugar
    • 1 cup corn syrup light or dark
    • 2 Tablespoons melted butter
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 3 eggs
    • 1 cup pecans chopped (or halved)
    • 1 unbaked 9-inch pie crust or use this pie crust recipe

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350F degrees. and place a rimmed baking sheet on the middle rack in the oven. Remove pie crust from refrigerator.
    • In a mixing bowl, mix together the sugars, eggs, corn syrup, vanilla, melted butter and cinnamon together until evenly mixed.
    • Add in the chopped pecans and stir to combine.
    • Unroll pie crust and place in baking dish, spreading it evenly to fit. Optional: pinch top sides of pie crust to create a "ruffle" for looks, and to help keep the pecan pie filling secure in the pie plate.
    • Stir the pecan pie filling one more time and pour in to pie plate.
    • Place pie plate on to the reheated baking sheet in the oven, and bake for 60 minutes or until the middle springs back when lightly touched.
    • Remove from oven, and allow to cool for at least 2 hours before serving.

    Notes

    If you find that the pie crust edges are turning brown too quickly, you can cover them with pieces of aluminum foil to prevent them from burning.
    Store: Refrigerate pie once it has fully cooled.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 303kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 46mg | Sodium: 109mg | Potassium: 77mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 39g | Vitamin A: 123IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 28mg | Iron: 1mg

    Roast Beef Sliders

    October 12, 2023

    Stack of roast beef sliders.

    Looking for the ultimate comfort food for game day? Sliders are super easy to make and create a pretty presentation. With two types of cheese, these Roast Beef Sliders will be sure to please, especially serving alongside another roast beef favorite, this reuben dip!

    These sliders are perfect as an appetizer recipe, or to even serve as a main dish for dinner or for lunch. It’s a sandwich recipe that serves all kinds of purposes!

    Stack of roast beef sliders on Hawaiian buns.

    I love hosting friends and family, whether it’s for a game night or to just hang out. Finger foods make things easy, and let everyone try lots of different foods. If you’re going to make these, you can also easily pop in a pan of cheeseburger sliders or these buffalo chicken sliders, since they cook at the same temp and time, or even other slider favorites like these sloppy joe sliders or Italian sliders.

    To round things out, set out munchies like a veggie tray with jalapeño ranch dip or hummus, and some of this honey lime fruit salad will cool things off.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • One dish meal: The sandwiches are assembled right in the baking dish!
    • Make-ahead recipe: It’s easy to freeze these so you can have them stashed away for busy nights.
    • Switch it out: Once you master this technique, you’ll want to customize it with your favorite ingredients, like how I make these corned beef sliders too!

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for roast beef sliders.
    • Roast beef – pick up thinly sliced or even shaved roast beef. This will help you create an even layer over the bread.
    • Cheese – muenster and provolone pair so nicely with beef, but you can swap out to Swiss or other favorites.
    • Hawaiian sweet rolls – you can also use original buns.
    • Butter – this is key for browning the tops as well as making your poppy seeds stick.
    • Seasonings – adding brown sugar, dijon, and Worcestershire to mayo adds a great creamy layer to these sandwiches.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Bread – you can use homemade rolls if you are up for it – but it’s best if you bake a type of dinner rolls that are “joined” together during baking. It’s easiest to assemble these if you have a “slab” of bread rather than individual rolls.
    • Meat – use turkey or chicken here, or ham. Any meat will work as long as it is thinly sliced!

    Equipment

    I recommend using a baking dish that is 9×6 inches, or whatever size your rolls fit in. A 9×13 is a common kitchen size, so you can easily double this recipe. Make it work for you and it isn’t a deal breaker if the pan is larger than the rolls, but they hold together better when tightly packed.

    How to Make Roast Beef Sliders

    Make and bake these now to enjoy! If you are looking to make these ahead of time, you can freeze them after they are fully cooked.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Preheat the oven and grease your baking dish before proceeding.

    Steps 1-4 of how to make roast beef sliders.

    STEP 1. Prep the bread. Slice the entire package of rolls in half horizontally, then place the bottom piece in the baking dish (Image 1).

    Tip: Use a bread or serrated knife and a gentle sawing motion. Take your time to try and be nice and even here and don’t break the rolls apart!

    STEP 2. Make the mayo. Add garlic to mayo and combine (Images 2 & 3).

    STEP 3. Spread. Spread mayo over the buns (Image 4).

    Steps 5-8 for making roast beef sliders.

    STEP 4. Layer it up! Add muenster, roast beef, and provolone in even layers over the buns (Images 5-7).

    STEP 5. Assemble. Place the top buns carefully over the layers (Image 8).

    Brushing buttery seasoning on top of Hawaiian rolls for roast beef sliders.

    STEP 6. Brush and bake. Whisk our seasoning and flavors into melted butter and brush over the tops of the rolls. Add poppy seeds (or sesame seeds) and bake!

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Allow to fully cool. If you are making these ahead of time, let cool to room temperature after baking before wrapping for the freezer.
    • Serve hot. These taste best when the cheese is nice and oozy, but they still taste great at room temp.
    Poppyseed sprinkled on top of buttery Hawaiian rolls.

    Recipe FAQs

    I have leftover butter, can I pour it all over the sliders?

    The leftover butter is great for dipping and brushing over the buns after baking! I wouldn't recommend pouring the entire thing over the buns before baking because the bread will soak it up and make a mushy mess.

    Do I have to use store-bought rolls or can I make my own?

    You can absolutely use homemade rolls. Just note that they won't be connected the same way store-bought rolls are, which will make assembly a bit more complicated.

    What if I don’t have the right size pan?

    If you don't have a 9×6-inch baking pan, you could use a cookie sheet to make these delicious roast beef sliders. Just note that the cheese and butter will run and likely make a bit of a mess. You can also use a 9×13 which is much more common, you’ll have a bit of a gap around the bread but that's ok!

    Roast beef slider in baking pan, with close up of meat and cheese.

    What to Serve with Beef and Cheese Sliders

    I always love chips and guac with sandwiches! Fresh salsa is another amazing dip to add. And of course, rounding the meal out with fruit salad and crudités makes these appetizers into a main course.

    Close-up of roast beef sliders, laying on their side, in baking dish.

    Storage

    • Refrigerator. Allow the sliders to cool to room temperature before sealing them in an airtight container and storing them in the fridge. You can keep them there for up to 4 days.   
    • Freezer. Once the sliders have cooled completely, seal them in an airtight, freezer-safe container and store them in the freezer for up to 3 months. Allow the sliders to thaw in the fridge before reheating.  
    • To reheat. Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F, arrange the sliders in a baking pan, and bake for 5-10 minutes or until heated through. Alternatively, pop a slider or two in the microwave and microwave for 30 seconds or until heated through. 
    Close up of stacked roast beef sliders on white plate.

    More Slider Recipes You’ll Love

    • Fish sliders on white plate.
      Fish Sliders
    • Turkey slider sitting on top of other turkey sliders with cheese.
      Turkey Sliders
    • Salmond slider with garlic aioli, tomato and lettuce.
      Salmon Sliders
    • A metal spatula holds a cranberry and turkey slider above a pan of the same slider sandwiches
      Turkey Cranberry Sliders

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Stack of roast beef sliders.
    Print Pin
    5 from 11 votes

    Roast Beef Sliders

    Looking for the ultimate comfort food for game day? Sliders are super easy to make and create a pretty presentation. With two types of cheese, these Roast Beef Sliders will be sure to please!
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 sliders
    Calories 303kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • 9×6-inch baking dish
    • Basting brush

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup mayonnaise
    • ½ tablespoon minced garlic
    • 12 Hawaiian sweet rolls
    • 6 slices muenster cheese
    • ½ pound thin-cut deli roast beef
    • 6 slices provolone cheese
    • ¼ cup melted butter
    • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
    • 1 teaspoon brown sugar
    • ½ teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
    • 1 tablespoon onion powder
    • 1 tablespoon poppy seeds

    Instructions

    • Prep. Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F and grease a 9×6-inch baking pan with nonstick cooking spray.
    • Make the spread. Whisk together the mayonnaise and minced garlic.
    • Assemble the sliders. Split the tops from the bottoms of the Hawaiian rolls, keeping the individual rolls connected if possible. Arrange the bottom halves in a baking dish, crust-side down. Spread the mayo mixture over the rolls. Arrange a layer of muenster, then roast beef, then provolone evenly over the rolls. Close the sliders with the top halves of the rolls.
    • Butter 'em up. Whisk together the melted butter, Dijon mustard, brown sugar, Worcestershire, and onion powder and brush the mixture evenly over the tops of the sliders. Sprinkle the sliders with poppy seeds.
    • Bake. Cover the baking pan with aluminum foil and bake for 10 minutes. Remove the aluminum foil and bake uncovered for 5 additional minutes, or until the cheese is nice and melted and the sliders are warm throughout.
    • Serve. Slice the sliders and serve as party appetizers or a delicious snack.

    Notes

    • I recommend a 9×6-inch baking pan – a 9×13 will work, and is more common in kitchens, but you want to try and have a pan about the same size as your “slab” of buns.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slider | Calories: 303kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 55mg | Sodium: 633mg | Potassium: 105mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 351IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 242mg | Iron: 1mg

    White Chocolate Crock Pot Candy

    October 8, 2023

    White chocolate crock pot candy on fabric napkin.

    Indulge your sweet tooth with this easy-to-make, delectable White Chocolate Crockpot Candy. Crafted with a mix of white chocolate, crunchy peanuts, and an almond bark, it’s a treat that will impress with a little chocolate and nutty crunchiness. 

    The best part? You can prepare this mouthwatering dessert recipe in your slow cooker with simple ingredients. Whether you’re prepping for a party, need a last-minute gift, or simply craving something sweet, this White Chocolate Crock Pot Candy is a 5-star rating crowd-pleaser. If you’re looking for another set it and forget it treat, this Crock Pot Rice Pudding turns out rich and creamy.

    White chocolate crock pot candy piled on fabric napkin.

    If you want to grab some more candy recipes that you can make at home, then check out this Candy Cane Pie as the classic Christmas option. Or, for something for the fall, try these Candy Corn Rice Krispie Treats as a fun way to make homemade sweet treats.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Crock Pot Candy Video

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • It uses a few ingredients: We used just three ingredients to make this simple treat.
    • Easy to personalize: You can easily switch out ingredients and use the same basic process for your favorite type of chocolate.
    • Crock pot recipe: There’s no need for a lot of pans or other equipment; you only need your slow cooker for this dish.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Ingredients for white chocolate crock pot candy.
    • Almond bark – We used white almond bark for this recipe
    • Chocolate – Keeping with the white theme, we also used white chocolate chips in the dish.
    • Peanuts – Make sure you use plain peanuts rather than salted peanuts or ones with a coating on them.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Almond bark: If you can’t find white almond bark, substitute it with candy melts. They melt smoothly and have a similar flavor profile.
    • White Chocolate: If you’re not a fan of white chocolate, you can swap it with milk chocolate or dark chocolate chips. The cooking process remains the same; only the taste will vary.
    • Peanuts: If you have a peanut allergy, use your favorite nuts like almonds, cashews, or pecans. Alternatively, for a nut-free option, try crisped rice cereal for a similar crunchy texture.

    Variations

    • Spiced Crock Pot Candy: Add a teaspoon of cinnamon or pumpkin spice to the mix to provide a warm, spiced twist to the candy.
    • Tropical Crock Pot Candy: Substitute peanuts with a cup of shredded coconut and a half cup of chopped dried pineapple to create a tropical flavor profile for your taste buds.
    • Choco-Mint Crock Pot Candy: Add a few drops of mint extract to the mix and substitute milk chocolate for white chocolate to create a refreshing choco-mint flavor.
    • Rocky Road Crock Pot Candy: Add a cup of mini marshmallows and substitute the peanuts with chopped almonds to create a rocky road style candy. Ensure to stir in the marshmallows after the chocolate has melted to prevent them from melting.
    • Choco-Nut Crock Pot Candy: Use a variety of nuts – almonds, cashews, and hazelnuts – instead of just peanuts for a mixed nut version. This variation gives a different crunch with every bite.

    How to Make White Chocolate Crock Pot Candy

    This slow cooker candy recipe is broken into 2 components:

    • melt the ingredients
    • remove from the slow cooker and allow to harden

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    STEP 1: Melt the ingredients. Melt chocolate for one hour on low. (Image 1-2)

    Step 2: Stir in peanuts into melted chocolate. (Image 3-4)

    Steps 1-4 of how to make  white chocolate crock pot candy.

    STEP 3: Divide out melted chocolate. Dollop a spoonful onto a parchment-lined baking sheet.

    Cookie dough scoop, scooping out white chocolate crock pot candy.

    STEP 4: Leave to set. Allow it to cool and harden.

    White chocolate crock pot candy on parchment paper to dry.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Stir occasionally: While the chocolate is melting, stir it occasionally to ensure all the pieces melt evenly and avoid burning.
    • Size of the candy: You can control the size of your candy pieces by the amount you scoop onto your parchment paper. For smaller, bite-sized pieces, use a smaller spoon.
    • Ingredient quality: For the best flavor, use high-quality white chocolate. Cheap chocolate can often leave a waxy taste.
    • Add peanuts: You can also spread more chopped peanuts on the top before the candy hardens.
    White chocolate crock pot candy with peanuts.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why didn’t my chocolate chips melt?

    It’s perfectly fine if some of your chocolate chips didn’t fully melt – some people prefer the added texture. You could extend the melting time slightly beyond an hour if you’d like them to melt more. However, be aware that stirring can cause the chocolate to splash onto the sides of the pot, where it can burn, especially if the mixture is thin. To avoid this, refrain from stirring the mixture often.

    What is almond bark used for?

    Almond bark is a versatile ingredient commonly used in baking and candy making. It is made from almond oil and sugar, giving it a smooth texture and rich flavor. Almond bark can be found in both white and chocolate varieties, making it perfect for creating different types of desserts. It can also be used as a coating for fruits or nuts or melted to create decorative drizzles on baked goods. 

    Is almond bark the same as white chocolate chips?

    While almond bark and white chocolate chips can be used in candy-making, some critical differences exist. Almond bark, contrary to its name, doesn’t actually contain almonds. It’s a vegetable oil-based product with a smooth, creamy texture that is ideal for melting and coating.

    On the other hand, white chocolate chips are made from cocoa butter, sugar, and milk solids. They offer a rich, creamy flavor, but their melting properties differ from almond bark. So, while they can be used interchangeably in some recipes, the final taste and texture may vary.

    How long does it take for almond bark to harden?

    It typically takes around 15-20 minutes for almond bark to harden at room temperature. However, if you’re using it in a recipe like this White Chocolate Crock Pot Candy, it will take longer to harden as the mixture is still warm when you spoon it out onto parchment paper. You can speed up the process by placing the candy in the fridge or freezer for a few minutes. 

    What to Serve with White Chocolate Crock Pot Candy

    White Chocolate Crock Pot Candy is a versatile treat that can be served in various ways. It pairs well with a hot beverage like coffee or tea, offering a delightful contrast of temperatures. You could serve it alongside other sweet treats such as fruit tarts or cheesecake for a dessert spread.

    This candy also makes for a delicious addition to a DIY dessert grazing board, combined with fresh fruits, assorted cheeses, and a selection of cookies. During the holiday season, serve it with mulled wine or eggnog for a festive treat.

    Extra peanuts sprinkled on top of white chocolate crock pot candy.

    Storage

    You can conveniently store any leftover White Chocolate Crock Pot Candy in an airtight container. Keep it at room temperature, and it will stay fresh for up to two weeks. If you prefer, you can also store it in the refrigerator, which will last for about a month.

    As for freezing, yes, you can freeze this candy. Pack the candy in freezer-friendly containers or zip-top freezer bags, ensuring to squeeze out any excess air to prevent freezer burn. The candy can be stored in the freezer for up to 3 months.

    When you’re ready to enjoy it, allow it to thaw at room temperature before serving. Freezing and thawing will not compromise the texture or flavor of the candy, making it a great option for making ahead of time for holidays or events.

    More Chocolate Recipes You’ll Love

    Don’t stop at these crock pot white chocolate candy treats; try these new recipes for chocolate, too! Start with the Pink Chocolate Covered Strawberries, which are perfect at any time of the year when fresh strawberries are available. Then, for a more seasonal treat, try some Mint Chocolate Brownies for a solid chocolate dessert.

    • white chocolate covered pecans in gray bowl
      Chocolate Covered Pecans
    • Slice of possum pie on a white plate with a fork sitting next to it with a bite on it.
      Possum Pie
    • Three chocolate rice krispie treats stacked on top of each other.
      Chocolate Rice Krispie Treats
    • Oreo Brookies
      Oreo Brookies

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    White chocolate crock pot candy on fabric napkin.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    White Chocolate Crock Pot Candy

    This white chocolate crock pot candy uses only a few ingredients, and just take a few minutes to dry and harden, and you're ready for a fun snack!
    Course Snack
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 1 hour hour
    Total Time 1 hour hour 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 24 candies
    Calories 148kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 lb Almond Bark
    • 1 cup White Chocolate Chips
    • 1 cup Salted Peanuts

    Instructions

    • Add almond bark and chocolate chips to slow cooker and melt for one hour on low.
    • Stir in peanuts.
    • Quickly dollop out a spoonful on to parchment paper.
    • If desired, sprinkle more peanuts on top before the chocolate hardens.
    • Allow to cool to harden.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1candy | Calories: 148kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 2mg | Sodium: 12mg | Potassium: 21mg | Fiber: 0.01g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 2IU | Vitamin C: 0.04mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 0.02mg

    Sweet Potato Crunch

    October 5, 2023

    Sweet potato crunch in white baking dish, with wooden spoon dipping out.

    Sweet Potato Crunch: Not only does this easy sweet potato casserole smell heavenly while baking, but it tastes amazing too! Buttery sweet potatoes with a hint of nutmeg are topped with a crunchy cinnamon pecan topping that is to die for. They rank right up there with these candied yams, for the perfect Thanksgiving side dish.

    Sweet potato crunch in white baking dish, on counter.

    This sweet potato crunch recipe will be your new Thanksgiving dinner must-have easy recipe! Serve it alongside our popular green bean casserole recipe and our corn casserole and the table will be full of goodness.

    Creamy sweet potatoes meets a golden brown, crunchy topping in this recipe for your Thanksgiving table. If you are looking for more Thanksgiving-inspired recipes, I think you’d love this Sweet Potato Pie recipe, this Thanksgiving Instant Pot Turkey Breast recipe as well as this Classic Orange Fluff Salad recipe to add to your Thanksgiving meal planner.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • It is a Thanksgiving classic: Sweet potato casserole and Thanksgiving go hand in hand. This upgrade is just what you need to spice things up this year!
    • Make-ahead recipe: You can easily make this recipe ahead of time before reheating for your Thanksgiving dinner.
    • It uses simple ingredients: All of the ingredients in this recipe are easy to find and affordable!

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for sweet potato crunch.
    • Cooked Sweet Potatoes – We suggest buying sweet potatoes and cooking them yourself.
    • Brown Sugar – Brown sugar is what helps caramelize the pecans. Make sure to choose that over white sugar.
    • Chopped Pecans – We suggest chopping them yourself for a more organic cut.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Butter – If you do not want to use melted butter, you can use a cooking oil of your choice for this recipe. Keep in mind that the flavor might change a little bit.
    • Sweet Potatoes – If you would prefer, you can buy precooked sweet potatoes for this recipe.

    How to Make Sweet Potato Crunch Casserole

    Making your sweet potato crunch recipe for Thanksgiving is fairly simple.

    This Sweet Potato Crunch is broken into 3 components:

    • making the sweet potato base
    • making the pecan crust
    • layering and baking

    This can easily be a make-ahead meal for Thanksgiving dinner! Simply make it ahead of time and then pop it back into the oven at 350 for 10-12 minutes to warm it back up!

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Remember, this recipe calls for cooked sweet potatoes. You will either want to cook the sweet potatoes yourself (what we recommend) or buy pre-cooked sweet potatoes.

    Prepare by preheating the oven to 350℉ and greasing a 9×13" baking dish.

    Mashed sweet potatoes in clear glass bowl.

    STEP 1. Mash the Sweet Potatoes. In a large bowl, mash the fresh sweet potatoes using a potato masher or fork. (Image 1).

    Tip: If you are cooking the sweet potatoes yourself, cook them right before mashing but be sure to let them cool a little bit before mashing and mixing into this recipe.

    STEP 2. Combine the Wet. In a medium mixing bowl, whisk together the eggs, half and half, melted butter, brown sugar, and nutmeg. (Image 2).

    Egg and spice mixture in glass bowl for sweet potato crunch.

    STEP 3. Combine. Pour the egg mixture (room temperature or not is fine) into the large bowl with the mashed sweet potatoes. Using a whisk, electric mixer, or fork, mix the ingredients together until they are combined. It's okay if the potatoes are lumpy. (Image 3).

    Egg mixture combined with sweet potato mixture in glass bowl.

    STEP 4. Make the Topping. To make the topping, mix the melted butter, brown sugar, flour, and cinnamon together in a bowl until combined. The mixture will be like wet sand. (Image 4).

    Spice mixture for "crunch" topping on sweet potato casserole.

    STEP 5. Add the Pecans. Add the chopped pecans to the topping mixture and stir to combine. (Image 5).

    Crunch topping mixture mixed with pecans, in glass mixing bowl.

    STEP 6. Start to Layer. Spread the creamy sweet potatoes mixture into the casserole dish in an even layer.  (Image 6).

    Sweet potato mixture spread in to white baking dish.

    STEP 7. Add the Pecan Topping. Sprinkle the pecan topping onto the potatoes in an even layer. (Image 7).

    Pecan crunch mixture on top of sweet potato casserole.

    STEP 8. Bake. Bake the casserole for about 30-40 minutes or until the topping has browned and the potatoes have cooked through. You can cover the casserole with foil if the top becomes too brown while baking. (Image 8).

    Baked sweet potato casserole in white baking dish.

    Recipe FAQs

    When to serve sweet potatoes

    Sweet potato dishes are very popular around fall, specifically around Thanksgiving for the holiday meal. This is the perfect side dish for Thanksgiving and a family favorite!

    Can you freeze sweet potato crunch?

    I suggest that you freeze the sweet potato casserole without baking it, pausing just before you add the pecan topping, and store it in the freezer for a maximum of three months.

    Can I make a sweet potato casserole ahead of time and freeze it?

    Yes! Get the sweet potato casserole all set and ready, but hold off on baking it. Just wrap it up with a double layer of aluminum foil and toss it in the freezer for as long as three months.

    Freshly cooked sweet potatoes vs. pre-cooked sweet potatoes

    Freshly cooked sweet potatoes and store-bought pre-cooked sweet potatoes do have a bit of a taste difference. When you cook sweet potatoes fresh, they tend to have a richer, more intense flavor, and their natural sweetness really shines through. On the other hand, store-bought pre-cooked sweet potatoes can be convenient but might not have that same depth of flavor. They can sometimes be a tad softer and slightly less sweet since they’ve been prepped in advance. So, if you’re all about that sweet potato goodness, going fresh might be the way to go for that extra flavor kick!

    Sweet potato crunch recipe with canned yams

    To make this sweet potato crunch recipe with canned yams, you would follow the same instructions and just swap out the sweet potatoes mentioned for canned yams!

    Can I add mini marshmallows?

    I don’t see why not! Thanksgiving isn’t Thanksgiving without a mini marshmallow and sweet potato dish! Simply add them to the crunchy pecan crumble topping for some added sweetness.

    What to Serve with Sweet Potato Crunch

    We recommend serving it with the hero of Thanksgiving, this Turkey recipe!

    A close-up look of inside of sweet potato casserole in white baking dish.

    Storage

    Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.

    A bite of sweet potato crunch on a spoon.

    More Thanksgiving Recipes You’ll Love

    If you are creating your Thanksgiving menu, make sure to check out these delicious Thanksgiving-inspired recipes, especially this southern broccoli casserole recipe!

    • A slice of strawberry heaven cake dessert on a plate.
      Strawberry Heaven
    • A slice of burnt sugar cake on a round, vintage plate.
      Burnt Sugar Cake
    • Strawberry Cream Cheese Dump Cake serving on a round plate.
      Strawberry Cream Cheese Dump Cake
    • Dr. Pepper baked beans in a cast iron and wooden spoon spooning out a serving.
      Dr. Pepper Baked Beans

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Sweet potato crunch in white baking dish, with wooden spoon dipping out.
    Print Pin
    5 from 6 votes

    Sweet Potato Crunch

    This sweet potato casserole smells heavenly while baking, it tastes amazing too! Buttery sweet potatoes with a hint of nutmeg are topped with a crunchy cinnamon pecan topping, ready in under an hour.
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 40 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour
    Servings 12 Servings
    Calories 377kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 4 pounds sweet potatoes About 4 large sweet potatoes, cooked and fork-tender
    • 2 large eggs
    • ½ cup half and half
    • ½ cup salted butter melted
    • ⅓ cup brown sugar packed
    • ½ teaspoon nutmeg

    Topping

    • ¼ cup salted butter melted
    • ½ cup brown sugar packed
    • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
    • 1 cup chopped pecans
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350℉ and grease a 9×13" baking dish.
    • In a large bowl, mash the potatoes using a potato masher or fork.
    • In a medium mixing bowl, whisk together the eggs, half and half, melted butter, brown sugar, and nutmeg.
    • Pour the egg mixture into the large bowl with the mashed sweet potatoes. Using a whisk, hand mixer, or fork, mix the ingredients together until they are combined. It's okay if the potatoes are lumpy.
    • To make the topping, mix the melted butter, brown sugar, flour, and cinnamon together in a bowl until combined. The mixture will be like wet sand.
    • Add the chopped pecans to the topping mixture and stir to combine.
    • Spread the sweet potato mixture into the baking dish in an even layer.
    • Sprinkle the pecan topping onto the potatoes in an even layer.
    • Bake the casserole for about 30-40 minutes or until the topping has browned and the potatoes have cooked through. You can cover the casserole with foil if the top becomes too brown while baking.

    Video

    Notes

    • The sweet potatoes need to be cooked before using them in this recipe. Use your favorite method of cooking potatoes – you can boil, bake, or steam them as long as they are fork-tender when assembling them for the recipe.
    • Make sure the potatoes aren't hot when adding the other ingredients to them. You don't want the egg mixture to cook before it gets into the oven. 
    • Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 377kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 61mg | Sodium: 195mg | Potassium: 595mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 21886IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 85mg | Iron: 1mg

    Cheesy Pull Apart Bread

    October 3, 2023

    Hand pulling a piece of cheesy pull apart bread off of loaf.

    Cheesy Pull Apart Bread: Have you ever come across those tasty-looking French bread pull-apart bread loaves on Instagram? You know, the yummy, cheesy, garlicky loaves diced up so you can pull them apart? Well, you are in luck because this cheesy pull-apart bread recipe is going to show you how to make it yourself so you can stop drooling!

    Bread recipes, especially those that are more of an appetizer, such as this pizza monkey bread, this French bread pizza, and this foccacia bread, are always a great choice!

    Cheesy pull apart bread, with hand pulling out a piece.

    Cheesy garlic bread pairs well with just about anything, but if I had to pick two recipes it would pair best with they would have to be this Sausage Pasta Bake and this Chicken Bolognese.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • It uses easy ingredients: The recipe calls for easy-to-find ingredients that you won’t have to search all over the grocery store for.
    • It’s deliciously cheesy: Packed with two blocks of cheese, this recipe will definitely fill your cheese craving.
    • It’s totally customizable: This cheesy pull apart bread recipe serves as a good base for even more deliciousness. See the ideas below for how to add to this recipe.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for cheesy pull apart bread.
    • Bread – We suggest a nice, dense loaf of bread for this recipe. We used a crusty Italian loaf.
    • Cheese – This recipe calls for two blocks of easy-to-find cheeses; mozzarella and cheddar cheese!
    • Garlic – We suggest 2 cloves of fresh garlic for this recipe but by all means, measure to your heart’s preference! Also, please go with fresh garlic. Garlic powder will not yield the same result!

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Bread – If you’d like to make this recipe Gluten-Free, opt for a GF variety of bread.
    • Cheese – Feel free to use your favorite cheeses in this recipe! If you would like to make this recipe dairy-free as well, opt for DF cheese varieties.

    Variations

    As I mentioned above, this cheesy pull apart bread recipe can easily be added to. Here are some variation ideas for this recipe:

    • Cheeses – This recipe could be kicked up a notch based on your cheese preference alone. Head to your local grocery store’s cheese department and try out some new varieties in this recipe such as provolone, muenster, or fontina.
    • Bread – Another way to dress up this recipe would be with your bread choice. You know what sounds yummy? This recipe with a sourdough garlic loaf of bread. Yum! Or classic sourdough bread!
    • Herbs – Add some Italian herbs to the butter mixture to enhance the flavor of this yummy cheesy garlic pull-apart bread. Or better yet, gather some fresh herbs to cook into this pull-apart cheese bread.

    How to Make Cheesy Pull-Apart Bread

    Making this recipe is pretty simple and is broken down into three parts:

    • preparing the melted butter and cheese
    • slicing the bread
    • stuffing the bread

    I suggest preparing this recipe right before you are supposed to be serving it. If you are making a pasta dish, prepare this cheesy pull-apart bread toward the end of the pasta’s cooking time.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    To prepare, line a baking sheet with two sheets of aluminum foil, positioning one lengthwise and the other widthwise to create a cross shape. Cover the foil with a piece of parchment paper and set the baking sheet aside.

    Steps 1-4 of how to make cheesy garlic pull apart bread.

    STEP 1. Shred. Grate the mozzarella and cheddar cheese and set them aside. (You can save time by using pre-shredded cheese). (Image 1). Chop up the green onion and set it aside as well.

    STEP 2. Prepare Garlicky Butter Mixture. Finely dice the two cloves of garlic and place them in a saucepan. Add the stick of unsalted butter, salt, pepper, and red pepper flakes to the saucepan. Put the saucepan on the stovetop and heat over medium heat until the butter just melts. Stir the mixture and set it aside while you prepare the bread. (Image 2).

    STEP 3-4. Slice Bread. Position your loaf of bread on a cutting board and cut it diagonally with a serrated knife, going about ¾ of the way through the loaf without completely separating the slices. Be sure to not cut through the bottom of the loaf. Make cuts about 1 inch apart. After cutting diagonally in one direction, repeat the process in the opposite direction, creating 1-inch sections of bread that are still attached to the loaf. You’ll end up with a grid pattern. (Images 3 & 4).

    Steps 5-8 of how to make cheesy bread.

    STEP 5-6. Stuff the Bread with the Garlic Butter. Using a spoon or pastry brush, evenly distribute the butter mixture so that the butter and garlic get into each of the cuts. (Images 5 &6).

    STEP 7-8. Stuff the Bread with the Cheeses. Sprinkle the shredded cheddar cheese evenly over the cuts and press it inside the bread loaf. Repeat this step with the mozzarella cheese. (Images 7 & 8).

    Steps 9-12 for making cheesy garlic pull apart bread.

    STEP 9. Top with Green Onions. Top the loaf with half of the sliced green onions. (Image 9).

    STEP 10-11. Cover the Bread. Close up the bread by bringing together the parchment paper and then one piece of foil. Secure the other piece of foil to cover the entire loaf. (Images 10 & 11).

    STEP 12. Bake and Serve. Bake at 350 degrees for 20 minutes. Then uncover the top of the loaf and bake for an additional 5 minutes. Remove from the oven and carefully unwrap the foil and parchment paper. Serve immediately with remaining green onions. (Image 12).

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Serve Right Away. This ooey-gooey cheese-stuffed bread loaf is best straight out of the oven! The melty cheese will perform best this way.
    • Refrigerate the Bread Beforehand. Refrigerating the loaf of bread overnight not only helped to keep it intact by firming it up slightly but also prevented the crust from becoming crumbly.
    Garlic cheesy pull apart bread on wooden cutting board.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use pre-shredded cheese?

    Absolutely! But if you really wanna get that epic cheesy pull, grab some block cheese and shred it yourself.

    Can you reheat pull-apart bread?

    Yep! If you want to reheat this bread, wrap it up in parchment paper and then aluminum foil. Pop it in the oven and set it to 350 degrees. Let the bread warm up as the oven does its thing. It should be good to go in roughly 10-12 minutes, but keep an eye on it after 8 minutes or so, as oven temperatures can vary.

    What is the best bread to use for this recipe?

    Any kind of hearty bread you grab from the store will do the trick for this recipe. Think baguettes, sourdough, or those rustic, crusty loaves for top-notch results. Just steer clear of the squishy, soft-crusted breads.

    How to cut bread to pull it apart?

    To cut bread so that you can pull it apart you will start by cutting diagonally down one way and then criss-crossing another round of diagnal cuts going the opposite direction. For a visual, check out Image 1 from the recipe instructions.

    What are cheese pull aparts?

    Pull-apart bread is like a cozy, cheesy, garlicky bread that’s sliced into these bite-sized, finger-friendly pieces you can just pick up and enjoy.

    Which cheese gives cheese pull?

    For the ultimate cheese pull, go with mozzarella-it’s the champ and that is why it is one of the cheeses featured in this recipe.

    What to Serve with Pull-Apart Cheesy Bread

    Cheesy garlic pull apart bread is the ultimate side dish or a delicious appetizer. Pair this pull apart bread recipe with any yummy pasta dish or better yet, some Lasagna Soup!

    Piece of garlic cheesy pull apart bread, being pulled off of loaf.

    Storage

    You can put this cheesy pull-apart bread in the fridge for around three days, just pop it in an airtight container or a sealed bag.

    More Bread Recipes You’ll Love

    We have plenty of yummy bread-centered recipes you will love if you loved this cheesy pull apart bread recipe. Here are some of the best ones!

    • Sliced lemon blueberry bread with lemon glaze.
      Lemon Blueberry Bread
    • Stack of homemade hush puppies on white plate, with one split open to show the inside.
      Hush Puppies
    • Sweet cornbread muffins stacked on a plate.
      Sweet Cornbread Recipe
    • Wooden spoon holding a serving of old-fashioned cornbread dressing.
      Old-Fashioned Cornbread Dressing

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Hand pulling a piece of cheesy pull apart bread off of loaf.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Cheesy Pull Apart Bread

    Cheesy meets garlicy in this ooey gooey cheesy pull apart bread recipe that is sure to be a hit for your next pasta night!
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes minutes
    Total Time 35 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 324kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 4 ounces Shredded Mozzarella Cheese about 1 cup
    • 4 ounces Shredded Cheddar Cheese about 1 cup
    • 1 Green Onion chopped
    • 2 cloves Garlic finely chopped (8-14 g)
    • 4 ounces Unsalted Butter
    • ½ teaspoons Salt 1 g
    • ½ teaspoons Pepper 1 g
    • ½ teaspoons Red Pepper Flakes 1 g
    • 1 Loaf Crusty Italian or Sourdough Loaf of Bread

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350 degrees F.
    • Line a baking sheet with two sheets of aluminum foil, positioning one lengthwise and the other widthwise to create a cross shape.
    • Cover the foil with a piece of parchment paper and set the baking sheet aside.
    • Grate the mozzarella and cheddar cheese and set them aside. (You can save time by using pre-shredded cheese).
    • Chop the green onion and set it aside.
    • Finely dice the two cloves of garlic and place them in a saucepan.
    • Add the stick of unsalted butter, salt, pepper, and red pepper flakes to the saucepan.
    • Put the saucepan on the stovetop and heat over medium heat until the butter just melts. Stir the mixture with a whisk, spoon, or fork, and set it aside while you prepare the bread.
    • Position your loaf of bread on a cutting board and cut it diagonally, going about ¾ of the way through the loaf without completely separating the slices. Make cuts about 1 inch apart.
    • After cutting diagonally in one direction, repeat the process in the opposite direction, creating 1-inch sections of bread that are still attached to the loaf.
    • Place the loaf on the prepared baking sheet (with the foil and parchment paper).
    • Using a spoon or pastry brush, evenly distribute the butter mixture so that the butter and garlic get into each of the cuts (or slices).
    • Sprinkle the shredded cheddar cheese evenly over the cuts (or slices) and press it inside the bread loaf. Repeat this step with the mozzarella cheese.
    • Top the loaf with half of the sliced green onions.
    • Close up the bread by bringing together the parchment paper and then one piece of foil. Secure the other piece of foil to cover the entire loaf.

    Notes

    The bread loaf got a good night’s rest in the fridge, and that made it hold together better by firming up a tad. Plus, it kept the crust from falling apart.
    If you’re using salted butter or margarine, cut down the salt by at least half.
    The red pepper flakes add a little zing, but they’re optional and you can skip ’em if you prefer.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 324kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 33g | Saturated Fat: 20g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 89mg | Sodium: 486mg | Potassium: 51mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 1098IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 214mg | Iron: 0.2mg

    Chicken Fajitas Wrap

    October 1, 2023

    Fajita wrap cut in half, sitting on a wooden cutting board.

    This Chicken Fajitas Wrap will give new life to tacos on Tuesday. Take the sizzling grilled fajita chicken and tuck it into a warm tortilla. Don’t stop there – let’s roll it up with rice and veggies and toast it!

    Easy chicken dinner recipes are a favorite, so we’ll even prep slow cooker shredded chicken for easy meals, although we’ll show you how to cook the chicken below with the veggies for extra flavor.

    Fajita wrap sliced in half, on wooden cutting board.

    I love coming up with new ways to serve chicken, especially when it comes to taco night. There’s no need to serve the same old thing week in and week out. Whether you want an entree next to your cold taco dip, or you want to fill the freezer with meals like this Dorito Chicken Casserole, this wrap fits the bill.

    Think of the best chicken burrito you’ve ever had, and then keep going. With fajita veggies and rice tucked into the burrito next to the chicken, you won’t believe your tastebuds!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Meal prep: Make your chicken ahead. We’re using precooked rice here, too. It’s easy to make ingredients one night and assemble and heat the next.
    • Customize the spices: The best part about home cooking is ensuring you enjoy the flavor. Adjust seasonings to your liking here.
    • Fill the freezer: This recipe makes 7 large burritos, so it’s perfect to serve for dinner and then wrap the rest for the freezer.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for fajita wraps.
    • Chicken – Boneless skinless chicken breast is cut into strips for so you get a taste in every bite.
    • Fajita seasoning – Fajita seasoning has a smoky flavor that is different than taco seasoning. It’s worth seeking out a packet!
    • Veggies – Bell peppers and white onion are the traditional fajita veggies.
    • Rice – I selected pre-cooked cilantro lime rice as it’s my favorite! Any variety will do.
    • Cheese – Monterey Jack is the perfect melty, stringy cheese-pull we need.
    • Tortillas – It wouldn’t be a wrap if we didn’t have these! Select large flour tortillas for maximum stuffing.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Rice – there is a wide selection of cooked rice at the store. If you aren’t a fan of cilantro, try a Mexican or Spanish rice.
    • Meat – I used chicken breast, but steak (such as this oven-baked steak) and shrimp (like this grilled shrimp) are also perfect. You can even mix and match in a single cooking session.
    • Cheese – Mexican blends or cheddar work well here, or a traditional cheese like Oaxaca or chihuahua. While Cotija is a good flavor, it isn’t a melting cheese so you won’t have the same texture.
    • Seasoning – Add fresh cilantro on top of your filling!

    How to Make Chicken Fajitas Wraps With Rice

    You can make everything at once to serve immediately, or you can go ahead and cook the chicken and veggies ahead of time. Then simply reheat and proceed with the recipe.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Steps 1-4 of how to make fajita wraps.

    STEP 1. Slice the chicken. Cut into strips and begin sautéing (Image 1).

    Tip: Slice everything to the same size and thickness. This will allow for even cooking as well as the perfect distribution in each wrap.

    STEP 2. Slice the produce. Add sliced veggies to the pan with the chicken (Image 2). Stir in the seasoning packet and water and simmer (Images 3 and 4).

    Steps 5-8 on how to make chicken fajita wraps.

    STEP 3. Cream the rice. Cook the rice per the bag and stir in the sour cream (Images 5 and 6).

    Tip: Stirring sour cream into the rice helps it stick together so it doesn’t tumble out when you take a bite.

    STEP 4. Begin assembly. Add creamy rice and then top with veggies, chicken, and cheese (Images 7 and 8).

    Steps 9-12 on how to make a fajita wraps recipe.

    STEP 5. Fold the wrap. Fold in the sides, then the bottom and roll up (Images 9 and 10).

    STEP 6. Toast. If desired, toast in a large skillet to a golden brown. Toasting the seam side down first will help seal the wrap (Image 11).

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Cool before storing. If making ahead for the freezer, I recommend letting the filling cool before wrapping in the tortilla and then wrapping with foil.
    • Toast the wrap. Toasting in a skillet will help seal the wrap for easier eating. Make sure and toast the seam side first.
    Cooked fajita wraps on wooden cutting board.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is the difference between taco and fajita seasoning?

    You might think they are similar, but taco seasoning leans on a tomato flavor. Fajita season focuses on paprika and smokiness. In a pinch you can certainly use either one – or even make your own seasoning blend.

    Should I cut chicken for fajitas before cooking?

    I definitely prefer to cut first! This allows for more surface area to be covered in seasoning while cooking. It will also cook faster and allow you to wrap things up quicker. I’m all about maximizing my flavor and time!

    How do you wrap a fajita?

    I think turning a fajita, which is often more like a soft taco, into a burrito is the perfect way to enjoy a meal! Place your filling closer to one end rather than the center to aid in wrapping. Then fold the sides in and a bottom before rolling up to complete. Overstuffing is the biggest culprit in messy rolling!

    Can I make chicken fajitas wraps gluten-free?

    Unfortunately, most gluten-free options don’t roll as well as flour tortillas. They like to tear. You can always give it a try if you have a favorite grain-free option, or use large butter lettuce leaves. The filling does make a delicious rice bowl, too – just don’t stuff tortillas with it! Ensure your seasoning mix is also gluten-free.

    What to Serve with Easy Chicken Fajita Wraps

    This wrap is super filling! It’s a great idea to even cut in half so everyone can enjoy a little bit of everything. Whipping up some of this Easy Elote Dip and serving with tortilla chips and salsa is a great option. Offering sour cream, guacamole, lime crema, or taco sauce is a fun idea.

    Cooked chicken fajita wraps cut in half.

    Storage

    Fridge: in an airtight container up to 5 days; just reheat by toasting or warming in the microwave.

    Freezer: wrapped in aluminum foil for up to 3 months; unwrap and warm when ready to eat.

    More Recipes You’ll Love

    • Fried Bologna and Egg Sandwich
      Fried Bologna and Egg Sandwich
    • Mozzarella wrap with tomato and basil
      Mozzarella Wrap with Tomato and Basil
    • Hot ham and cheese sandwich on white plate
      Hot Ham and Cheese Sandwiches
    • egg salad on croissant
      The BEST Egg Salad Recipe

    Or, we think you’ll also really love these red pork tamales for a meal next time!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Fajita wrap cut in half, sitting on a wooden cutting board.
    Print Pin
    5 from 5 votes

    Chicken Fajitas Wrap

    Think of the best chicken burrito you've ever had, and then keep going. With fajita veggies and rice tucked into the burrito next to the chicken, you won't believe your tastebuds!
    Course Dinner, Lunch
    Cuisine American, Mexican
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 7 wraps
    Calories 430kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 2 Tablespoons Cooking Oil
    • 1 Pound Boneless Skinless Chicken Breast Cut into Strips
    • 2 Peppers Cut into Strips (I like to use two different colors)
    • 1 Small Onion Sliced into Strips
    • 1 Packet of Fajita Seasoning 1.12 ounces
    • ¼ Cup of Water
    • 8.5 Ounce Package of Prepared Rice Cilantro and Lime Flavor
    • ⅓ Cup Sour Cream
    • 1 ½ Cups Monterey Jack Cheese Shredded
    • 7-8 Large Tortillas Burrito Size

    Instructions

    • Heat oil and chicken over medium high heat.
    • Cook chicken for about 3 minutes until it is no longer pink, then add vegetables.
    • Cook the vegetables and chicken for another 3 to 5 minutes stirring frequently. Next add water and seasoning. Stir until coated and chicken is done and vegetables are slightly soft.
    • Remove from heat and cover with a lid until you're ready to assemble the wraps.
    • Cook the rice according to package directions. Then in a small mixing bowl add the sour cream and cooked rice; mix well.
    • Assemble the wrap by placing a ¼ cup of the rice mixture onto the lower ⅓rd of the tortilla. Then add ½ cup of the chicken and ¼ cup of cheese to the wrap.
    • Roll the tortilla into a burrito shape; first by tucking in the sides and then rolling up from the bottom.
    • Optional: Toast the wraps in a pan with oil or butter for extra flavor and texture.

    Notes

    • You can also use a Mexican cheese blend.
    • I love the cilantro and lime rice but if cilantro isn’t your thing the Spanish style or Mexican rice would work great as well.
    • Warming your tortillas first will make rolling them much easier.
    • I used chicken but steak, shrimp, or a mix of proteins would also be excellent choices.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1wrap | Calories: 430kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 69mg | Sodium: 975mg | Potassium: 418mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 869IU | Vitamin C: 31mg | Calcium: 273mg | Iron: 3mg

    Breakfast Egg Rolls

    September 29, 2023

    Close up of breakfast egg rolls with bacon and eggs inside.

    Breakfast Egg Rolls will be your new weekend favorite! Tired of the same old eggs day in and day out? Make a fun new breakfast recipe by tucking those eggs into wrappers and giving them a quick fry!

    Cooking the bacon in the air fryer ahead of time, or even baking turkey bacon in the oven for this recipe, is a great way to prep for this recipe too!

    Close up of breakfast egg rolls on plate next to bowl of syrup.

    Everyone loves egg rolls, whether it’s from Chinese takeout or making your own southwest egg rolls at home! Have you ever tried them for breakfast, though? Very similar to breakfast burritos (and just as easy to make ahead), but the added crunch from frying, just like in these homemade avocado wontons, really adds to the meal.

    Make your own brunch bar and invite everyone over. Slice the finished egg rolls in half and add to a platter of mini delights including Breakfast Pigs in a Blanket and Breakfast Sliders.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • New techniques: Even if you’ve never wrapped up egg rolls or deep-fried food, this is an easy introduction to both techniques.
    • Make-ahead recipe: You can totally cook these ahead for a brunch meal and reheat in the oven.
    • Customize the filling: I used classic bacon and cheddar, but you can add veggies or anything you like to your eggs.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for breakfast egg rolls.
    • Egg roll wrappers – Find these in the produce section – ready to roll!
    • Eggs – Season your eggs well and scramble them up.
    • Bacon – I prefer mine nice and crispy to add interest.
    • Cheese – Classic shredded cheddar pairs nicely here.
    • Green onion – A nice little finishing flavor.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Cheese – pair your cheese with your meat. Swiss would be lovely with ham.
    • Meat – chop up leftover ham or use breakfast sausage crumbles. You can even slice up sausage links.
    • Veggies – not a fan of green onion or just want more veggies? Try some bell pepper instead.

    Variations

    • Cook Method – You don’t need to deep fry these if you don’t want to. You can also bake your egg rolls; they will not brown the same but still taste great. Place rolls on a parchment paper lined baking sheet then spray with cooking oil. Bake them at 425 degrees for 15-20 minutes.  

    Equipment

    A candy or deep fry thermometer is a great item to have in your kitchen. Frying at the proper temperature ensures a crispy finish without too much oil soaking into the food (if frying in a pan).

    You can also purchase a home countertop deep fryer if you plan to do a lot of cooking!

    How to Make Bacon Cheese Egg Rolls

    If you want to make these ahead of time, you will want to completely assemble and fry. Let cool and then store in the fridge.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Steps 1-4 of how to make breakfast egg rolls.

    STEP 1. Prepare ingredients. Cook and dice everything. You can either make these ahead or do it all now. (Image 1).

    Tip: Season the scrambled eggs well when cooking them. This will carry over to the finished dish so the eggs aren’t bland.

    STEP 2. Combing filling. Stir up the filling well to make sure you’ll get a bit of everything in each egg roll (Image 2).

    STEP 3. Fill. Add a scoop of filling to an egg roll wrapper. See the photo for placement (Image 3).

    STEP 4. Glue it shut. Use a pastry brush or your finger to spread a little water along all edges (Image 4).

    Steps for how to roll a breakfast egg roll.

    STEP 5. Roll it up. Follow the photos above to tuck the food in, roll it up, and seal the edges.

    STEP 6. Fry til golden. Use a deep fryer or large pot to fry until golden brown. Let drain on a paper towel.

    Deep fried breakfast egg rolls.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Season everything. Seasoning the eggs when cooking is essential! Select strong cheese flavors and include the green onions. When every ingredient has a good flavor nothing gets lost.
    • Correct temperature. Heating your deep fryer or oil to 375° F is essential. This temperature ensures the food won’t soak up the oil and will instead fry to a crisp, crunchy delight.
    Stack of cooked breakfast egg rolls on white plate.

    Recipe FAQs

    What are egg roll wrappers?

    These are fun little squares of dough that are all ready to go for you to make your own egg rolls! Look for them in the produce section, usually with the tofu. I picked classic squares but you can also find wonton wrappers or large circles. Any of these will work but will yield a different amount of “egg rolls.”

    Do I need to deep fry breakfast egg rolls?

    This gives the best texture, but I know it’s not for everyone! You can also shallow fry in a pan, making sure to turn often for even color. Also try baking them in the oven, though they won’t be quite as crisp and brown. You can give a light mist of cooking spray before baking.

    What to Serve with Breakfast Egg Rolls

    Yogurt and fruit are a great, light side dish to these fried delights.

    Don’t skip the dip! Maple syrup is fun and the perfect breakfast pairing. Thai chili sauce was actually the favorite in my house. And especially if you are using sausage in these egg rolls, a classic white gravy or jalapeño sausage gravy is also delicious.

    Close up of open breakfast egg roll.

    Storage

    Serve immediately for the best texture.

    You can also store these, fully cooked, in an airtight container in the fridge for up to a week. Simply reheat in the microwave or pop in the oven to revive the crunch.

    Breakfast egg roll being dipped in to white bowl with syrup.

    More Egg Recipes You’ll Love

    • OMG YUUM!!! Ham, Pineapple, Egg and pepperjack cheese, on a Hawaiian bun!
      Hawaiian Breakfast Sandwich
    • Bacon Egg and Cheese
      Bacon Egg and Cheese Sandwich
    • Waffle Burger on white plate with small bowl of syrup
      Waffle Burger
    • sausage and egg casserole being lifted out of baking dish
      Sausage and Egg Casserole

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Close up of breakfast egg rolls with bacon and eggs inside.
    Print Pin
    5 from 5 votes

    Breakfast Egg Rolls

    Tired of the same old eggs day in and day out? Make a fun new breakfast by tucking those eggs into wrappers and giving them a quick fry! Breakfast Egg Rolls will be your new weekend favorite!
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 6 minutes minutes
    Total Time 21 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 387kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 Cup Scrambled Eggs about 5 eggs
    • 1 Cup Cheddar Cheese
    • ½ Cup Bacon Cooked and Crumbled
    • ¼ Cup Green Onion Finely Diced
    • 1 Tablespoon Sour Cream
    • 8 Egg Roll Wrappers
    • ¼ Cup Water
    • Cooking Oil for Frying
    • Syrup, Thai Sweet Chili Sauce, or White Gravy for Dipping Optional

    Instructions

    • In a large mixing bowl stir together eggs, bacon, cheese, sour cream, and onion.
    • With the egg roll wrapper at a diagonal, put ⅓ cup of the egg mixture onto the bottom ⅓rd of the wrapper.
    • Brush water on the edges of the wrapper.
    • Roll the egg roll by first tucking the bottom corner under the filling, you will want to get this kind of tight. Then roll up until the sides are even with the top triangle. Then fold in the sides. Continue to roll until the top corner is touching the body of the egg roll. Press the seam to seal. This takes practice, but even the not so perfect ones taste great!
    • Heat cooking oil to 375 degrees. Place egg rolls into the hot oil; do not over crowd the fryer.
    • Cook for 2-3 minutes being sure to flip so that they brown on all sides.
    • Remove rolls from the oil and place onto a paper towel lined plate.
    • Once cool, enjoy these delicious egg rolls dipped in syrup, Thai chili sauce, or white gravy.

    Notes

    • If you don’t have a deep fryer you can use a frying pan with oil. Just make sure to flip half way through to brown on all sides.
    • You can also bake your egg rolls; they will not brown the same but still taste great. Place rolls on a parchment paper lined baking sheet then spray with cooking oil. Bake them at 425 degrees for 15-20 minutes.
    • For the best flavor, season your eggs when scrambling. I like to use salt and pepper then cook in butter.
    • These store well in the fridge for up to a week. Reheat in the microwave or oven.
    • We tried lots of dips but the chili sauce was our favorite.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1egg roll | Calories: 387kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 146mg | Sodium: 743mg | Potassium: 169mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.3g | Vitamin A: 365IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 162mg | Iron: 4mg

    Chicken Club Sandwich

    September 27, 2023

    Chicken club sandwich in platter next to french fries.

    Chicken Club Sandwich: This is a simple recipe that consists of three musts: good white bread, fresh and delicious chicken breast half, slices of ham, and crispy bacon. All of the extra add-ons make it that much better, and it’s ready in 10 minutes!

    Chicken club sandwich in basket next to french fries.

    Along with our crispy chicken burger, this chicken caprese sandwich, and our chicken grilled cheese, this club sandwich fits right in, and they all offer an amazing variety of flavors, even using similar ingredients.

    If sandwich recipes are your thing (hello, easy lunch ideas), you should check out our Subway Crab Sandwich and our Chicken Grilled Cheese Sandwich. Both are quick and easy to make and oh-so-tasty.

    Have you ever had one of your favorite sandwiches in pinwheel form? These pinwheel sandwiches are such a fun appetizer or lunch. Pair these easy lunch recipes with this cucumber salad that can be kept in the refrigerator!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • It is ready in 10 minutes: From start to finish, this sandwich recipe will take you 10 minutes at most!
    • Perfect lunch option: This sandwich is ideal for a make-ahead, workday lunch. Just stick the mayo in a little container so the sandwich doesn’t get soggy by lunchtime.
    • It’s very customizable: While I have listed the classic ingredients of a Chicken Club, there are many routes you could go to upgrade the sandwich (and I list them out below).

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some notes about key ingredients. You can find the full list of ingredients and instructions in the recipe card below.

    Labeled ingredients for chicken club sandwich.
    • White Bread – I suggest the cheapest white bread you can get. It really adds to the nostalgic taste of the sandwich!
    • Rotisserie Chicken – Slicing the breasts on a rotisserie chicken is easy chicken to use! But you can also boil chicken breasts or cook with your favorite method and use those instead.
    • Crispy Bacon – For the best crunch, you’re going to want some crispy bacon on your sandwich. We absolutely love cooking bacon in the air fryer but we’ve also cooked turkey bacon in the oven, so that’s an option as well. Use any leftover bacon to make this Avocado BLT Sandwich the rest of the week too!

    Substitutions

    • Bread – If you are trying to be more health conscious, you could easily swap out the white bread we suggest for a bread you prefer.
    • Romaine Lettuce – Swap this one out for some arugula to add an added kick to your sandwich and change up the texture. Or you could go with classic lettuce shreds.
    • Mayonnaise – If you’re not a big mayo fan, opt for Miracle Whip or even some Aioli! Some Garlic Aioli like we used on our salmon sliders, would really dress up this easy sandwich recipe. Your favorite sauce would likely pair well with this chicken sandwich!

    Variations

    • Veggies – If you’re not a big fan of the classic lettuce and tomato slices as this recipe calls for, you could easily switch it to your preferred vegetables (or go with none at all).
    • Cheese – Have a favorite cheese you want to include? Add it in! Swap out one of the cheese listed, or simply add another slice of cheese to the mix because honestly, can you ever have too much cheese?

    How to Make a Classic Chicken Club Sandwich

    Making the best Chicken Club Sandwich is about as easy as can be.

    I suggest buying a full rotisserie chicken for this recipe to get the best rotisserie chicken breast flavor. If you need ideas for how to use the rest of the rotisserie chicken, check out this recipe for Chicken Salad with Grapes and Apples for using the leftover chicken.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    We have a suggested way to layer this club sandwich for the best flavor and texture, but feel free to layer however you like!

    PREP. Chop. Begin by preparing your ingredients. Slice your tomatoes and cheese, chop your lettuce, and break apart your rotisserie chicken. If you bought bacon you have to cook on the stove, prepare that as well.

    Steps 1-4 of how to make chicken club sandwiches.

    STEP 1. Lay Out Bread Slice. Lay 1 of the pieces of bread on a plate or cutting board and spread 1 tablespoon of mayo over it.

    STEP 2-5. Assemble the First Layer. Layer 1 slice of cheddar cheese, 2 slices of ham, ½ of the chicken, a slice of tomato, 2 slices of bacon, and a romaine leaf on top of the bread.

    STEP 6. Add the Next Slice of Bread. Stack the second piece of bread on top and spread 1 tablespoon of mayo over it. The extra slice of bread in the middle of this chicken sandwich is what makes it a club sandwich (fun fact).

    Steps 5- 8 of how to make chicken club sandwiches.

    STEP 7-11. Add the Next Layer. Layer 1 slice of muenster, 2 slices of ham, ½ of the chicken, 1 slice of tomato, 2 slices of bacon, 1 romaine leaf, and 1 slice of cheddar on top of the bread.

    Steps 9-12 of how to make chicken club sandwiches.

    STEP 12. Finish the Sandwich. Spread 1 tablespoon of mayo over the last slice of bread and place it mayo-side-down on top of the sandwich to close it.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Serve right away. Ensure that this really good sandwich won’t get soggy from the mayonnaise by enjoying it right away.
    • Temperature. Make sure to pull the ingredients straight from the fridge for preparation. This will ensure a nice, cold sandwich!
    Chicken club sandwich cut in to wedges, on 
a white plate.

    Recipe FAQs

    Should I eat my chicken club sandwich warm or cold?

    This chicken club sandwich is definitely best enjoyed cold (although the toasted golden brown bread might be slightly warm when you first dive in).

    Chicken club vs. chicken sandwich?

    A chicken club sandwich has 3 layers of bread as opposed to the 2 in a chicken sandwich. It is also sometimes called a clubhouse sandwich, thanks to Saratoga Clubhouse who claims to have made it first.

    Can I make this ahead of time and freeze it?

    Unfortunately, no. The best you can do when it comes to making this recipe ahead of time is to slice all of the ingredients and store them in separate airtight containers in the fridge until you are ready to assemble (ideally within a day or two).

    What else can I add to my chicken club sandwich?

    I love how versatile this club sandwich is. Don't limit yourself to meats, cheeses, tomatoes, and lettuce. Feel free to add avocado, garlic aioli, cucumber, and/or a fried egg. I even love incorporating a little everything bagel seasoning into the sandwich. You can also feel free to swap out the ham for a different deli meat of your choosing. Turkey or prosciutto would be a great way to go. 

    What does a club sandwich contain?

    A club sandwich typically contains layers of sliced turkey or chicken breast, crispy bacon, fresh lettuce, ripe tomato slices, and mayonnaise. These ingredients are stacked between three slices of bread (usually toasted).

    What does “club” mean in “chicken club”?

    In the term “chicken club,” the word “club” refers to the style of sandwich it is. It involves stacking multiple layers of ingredients between slices of bread in a triple-decker fashion.

    What to Serve with Chicken Club Sandwich

    This Chicken Club Sandwich goes well with my Italian Chopped Salad, or Honey Lime Fruit Salad. However, if you’re feeling like you want to keep it simple, some classic French fries or potato chips would be a great pairing!

    Close up of wedge of chicken club sandwich.

    Storage

    I recommend eating this sandwich as soon as possible after assembling it. That being said, if you want to make it ahead of time or find yourself with leftovers, just seal it in a Ziplock bag or an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. Note that it will start to get soggy as it sits. 

    More Sandwich Recipes You’ll Love

    If you loved this Chicken Club Sandwich recipe, we think you’ll love these too, especially this chicken bacon ranch sandwich recipe.

    • Curry chicken salad with grapes in a white bowl.
      Curry Chicken Salad
    • Chicken salad with grapes and apples, sitting on bread.
      Harvest Chicken Salad
    • Crack Chicken Sandwich on wooden cutting board.
      Crack Chicken Sandwiches
    • Wiener Winks baked and resting on parchment-paper-lined baking sheet.
      Wiener Winks

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Chicken club sandwich in platter next to french fries.
    Print Pin
    5 from 5 votes

    Chicken Club Sandwich

    Making the best chicken club sandwich is easy once you have your key ingredients of white bread, rotisserie chicken breast, honey ham, bacon, cheese, lettuce, tomato, and mayonnaise.
    Course Dinner, Lunch
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 1 sandwich
    Calories 1262kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 3 slices white bread toasted
    • 3 tablespoons mayonnaise
    • 2 slices white cheddar cheese
    • 4 slices honey ham thin slices
    • 1 slice rotisserie chicken breast
    • 2 slices tomato thick slices
    • 4 slices crispy bacon
    • 2 romaine lettuce leaves
    • 1 slice muenster cheese

    Instructions

    Assemble

    • Lay 1 piece of bread on a plate or cutting board and spread 1 tablespoon of mayo over it.
    • Layer 1 slice of cheddar cheese, 2 slices of ham, ½ of the chicken, a slice of tomato, 2 slices of bacon, and a romaine leaf on top of the bread.
    • Stack the second piece of bread on top and spread 1 tablespoon of mayo over it. Layer 1 slice of muenster, 2 slices of ham, ½ of the chicken, 1 slice of tomato, 2 slices of bacon, 1 romaine leaf, and 1 slice of cheddar on top of the bread. Spread 1 tablespoon of mayo over the last slice of bread and place it mayo-side-down on top of the sandwich to close it.
    • Slice. Place your sandwich picks in the center of the top, bottom, and side of the sandwich making sure they hold all the way through the sandwich. If the picks are too short you can insert a second pick through the bottom. Slice the sandwich from corner to corner. Serve.

    Notes

    Rotisserie chicken breast makes this sandwich the best, but you can use sliced chicken breast if you prefer it!
    Toast your bread prior to layering for a bit of a crunch.
    Ensure that this really good sandwich won’t get soggy from the mayonnaise by enjoying it right away.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1sandwich | Calories: 1262kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 63g | Fat: 92g | Saturated Fat: 32g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 25g | Monounsaturated Fat: 28g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 202mg | Sodium: 3042mg | Potassium: 927mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 6212IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 794mg | Iron: 5mg

    Fried Deer Tenderloin Recipe

    September 24, 2023

    Fried deer meat on red and white towel.

    You’ll never want to cook deer meat any other way when you find out how to make this venison backstrap recipe!

    Frying deer meat is our family’s favorite way to enjoy venison, however, if a fried version isn’t what you prefer, you will enjoy this deer steak on the stovetop, grilled venison steak and marinade or even a pan-fried deer steak!

    Venison Backstrap Recipe - Fried Deer Meat

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    If you’re not a fan of a gamey taste, you’ll ESPECIALLY love this recipe because of the way this venison is cooked. However, even if you don’t mind the deer meat flavor, frying it is still one of the most popular recipes because of how delicious it really is!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    How to Slice Deer Tenderloin

    My dad (the king of frying deer meat), swears that the key to creating the BEST fried deer meat, depends on how it’s sliced. He was nice enough to let me grab a quick video while he was cutting it, so you can see just how he does it! (So make sure to watch the video here in this post!)

    Tip for tender deer meat: He said cutting it against the grain, can make it much more tender. Plus, for a really tough deer, you can even take your knife and gently tap each piece after you cut it, to tenderize it.

    Ingredients

    For this recipe, it doesn’t take a lot and they’re all simple ingredients that you probably already have on hand!

    ** See below which breading type you prefer, and how to make each type.

    A white platter with different types of fried deer meat.

    For very light breading:

    • 1-2 pounds deer meat tenderloin and/or backstrap, sliced in to ¼ inch slices
    • 2 Tablespoons salt, for soaking
    • 2 Tablespoons salt, for flour breading + additional to taste after fried
    • 2 cups water
    • 3 cups flour
    • 2 cups vegetable oil
    • Greek seasoning, optional

    For heavier breading:

    All the above, plus 3-4 eggs.

    How to Make Venison Backstrap with Light Breading

    (Darker deer meat, with only flour.)

    Close up of fried deer meat with little breading.
    1. In a bowl, mix together water and 2 tablespoon salt. Soak sliced deer meat in salt water overnight if you’re able, or at least an hour.
    2. Heat vegetable oil in a skillet over medium heat to 325 degrees. (My favorite to use is my Lodge Cast Iron Skillet )
    3. Remove deer meat from refrigerator, and discard salt water (It may be best to leave it sit out for 15 minutes or so, so you won’t be frying very cold meat in hot oil.)
    4. Pat the deer meat dry, with paper towels (UPDATE: We left the deer meat wet the other night, and dipped it in flour, and woah… that wasn’t too shabby. So it’s up to you!)
    5. Mix flour and 2 tablespoon salt, in a ziptop bag or a separate bowl/plate for coating
    6. Coat deer meat in flour/salt mixture
    7. Place the coated deer meat pieces into the heated vegetable oil. (To test the oil’s temperature, sprinkle a bit of flour in the oil to see if it bubbles. If it bubbles, it’s ready. However, be careful not to get the oil too hot, so it doesn’t splatter and burn you when adding the deer meat.)
    8. Flip deer meat after a few minutes when the underside is golden-brown. (Approx. 3 minutes)
    9. Cook on the alternate side until cooked through and there is no sign of undercooked meat. (We’ve been playing around with this recipe, and if you like a crunchy breading on your deer meat, cook it a bit longer until it reaches the desired “crunch,” you prefer.)
    10. Inside of fully cooked meat will be gray/brown, with no sign of red.
    11. Remove deer meat from pan, on to plate/dish covered with paper towels to drain oil.
    12. OPTIONAL: We LOVE sprinkling Greek Seasoning on the fried deer meat after it is fried for optimal flavor!

    How to Make Venison Backstrap with Heavier Breading:

    1. In a bowl, mix together water and 2 tablespoon salt. Soak sliced deer meat in salt water overnight if you’re able, or at least an hour.
    2. Heat vegetable oil in a skillet over medium heat to 325 degrees. (My favorite to use is my Lodge Cast Iron Skillet )
    3. Remove deer meat from refrigerator, and discard salt water (It may be best to leave it sit out for 15 minutes or so, so you won’t be frying very cold meat in hot oil.)
    4. Pat the deer meat dry, with paper towels (UPDATE: We left the deer meat wet the other night, and dipped it in flour, and woah… that wasn’t too shabby. So it’s up to you!)
    5. Mix flour and 2 tablespoon salt, in a ziptop bag or a separate bowl/plate for coating.

    For Semi-Thick Breading: For deer meat with the type of breading in the middle of the photo below, whisk the 3-4 eggs in a small bowl. Dip each piece of deer meat in to the eggs and then in flour. (Result in image below.)

    Fried deer meat coating in egg and then flour.

    For Thicker breading: For deer meat with the thicker breading, whisk the 3-4 eggs in a bowl. Then, dip the deer meat in flour, then in the eggs, and then the flour again. (Result in image below.)

    Fried deer meat coated in flour, egg and then flour again.

    How to Fry the Deer Meat

    (No matter how you choose to bread it.)

    1. Place the coated deer meat pieces into the heated vegetable oil. (To test the oil’s temperature, sprinkle a bit of flour in the oil to see if it bubbles. If it bubbles, it’s ready. However, be careful not to get the oil too hot, so it doesn’t splatter and burn you when adding the deer meat.)
    2. Flip deer meat after a few minutes when the underside is golden-brown. (Approx. 3 minutes)
    3. Cook on the alternate side until cooked through and there is no sign of undercooked meat. (We’ve been playing around with this recipe, and if you like a crunchy breading on your deer meat, cook it a bit longer until it reaches the desired “crunch,” you prefer.)
    4. Inside of fully cooked meat will be gray/brown, with no sign of red.
    5. Remove deer meat from pan, on to plate/dish covered with paper towels to drain oil.
    6. OPTIONAL: We LOVE sprinkling Greek Seasoning on the fried deer meat after it is fried for optimal flavor!

    Expert Tips

    • My husband and I also love to sprinkle Cavender’s Greek Seasoning, over the top after frying so it adds an extra kick of flavor. Then, if we are feeling frisky, we top it with a bit of Frank’s Hot Sauce.
    • My sister prefers dipping the deer meat in to milk, then in to flour before frying, and she swears by it!
    Venison Backstrap on Plate with Red Towel

    FAQs

    Do you need to soak venison backstrap?

    Although I recommend soaking the deer meat in saltwater, it’s not something you have to do. It can help draw blood out and remove a gamey taste that it may have. Some also soak in milk instead of water and believe that it helps keep it tender and juicy.

    Do you have to marinate venison tenderloin?

    We don’t recommend marinating venison in dressings, oils, or any flavorings when frying with this recipe. So besides soaking in salt water or milk, if desired to help remove a gamey taste, marinating ingredients are not necessary.

    Can you freeze venison tenderloin?

    Absolutely. If freezing a deer tenderloin or backstrap, it’s recommended that you slice it in to small pieces (as shown in the video above), before freezing. So when you’re ready to cook it, you can thaw it out much faster and it will already be cut for frying. Freeze in food-saving bags or your favorite freezer packaging.

    How to Store Leftover Venison

    If you have leftover fried deer meat, store cooled deer in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.

    Side Dishes for Venison

    What goes good with venison backstrap? Some of our favorites to serve with is are white gravy, or for fun, chorizo gravy, mashed potatoes, and biscuits. However, this romaine side salad and this roasted broccoli are other favorite vegetables to serve with it!

    Related Recipes

    If you have more venison, you’ll also love this air fryer deer meat that only takes 5-7 minutes to make! If you have ground venison, you’ll want to also try this venison chili recipe!

    Or, if fried steaks are your favorite, you’ll love this old-fashioned country fried steak recipe. Or, these country-fried pork chops are a family favorite in our house!


    Make sure to see the 80+ easy dinner recipes to add to your dinner idea meal planner!

    Recipe

    Fried deer meat on red and white towel.
    Print Pin
    4.52 from 62 votes

    Fried Deer Tenderloin Recipe

    Fried deer tenderloin that may just change the way you cook deer meat or venison backstrap, forever! Tender, juicy, and delicious!
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 1 hour hour
    Cook Time 6 minutes minutes
    Resting Time 1 hour hour
    Total Time 1 hour hour 6 minutes minutes
    Servings 40 pieces
    Calories 188kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1-2 pounds deer meat tenderloin and/or backstrap, sliced in to ¼ inch slices
    • 2 Tablespoons salt for soaking
    • 2 Tablespoons salt for flour breading + additional to taste after fried
    • 2 cups water
    • 3 cups flour
    • 2 cups vegetable oil Or enough to create ½ inch to 1 inch of oil in the skillet.
    • Greek seasoning optional

    Optional for Thicker Breading

    • 4 eggs

    Instructions

    • In a bowl, mix together water and 2 tablespoon salt. Soak sliced deer meat in salt water overnight if you’re able, or at least an hour.
    • Heat vegetable oil in a skillet over medium heat to 325 degrees.
    • Remove deer meat from refrigerator, and discard salt water
    • Pat the deer meat dry, with paper towels (UPDATE: We left the deer meat wet the other night, and dipped it in flour, and woah… that wasn’t too shabby. So it’s up to you!)
    • Mix flour and 2 tablespoon salt, in a ziptop bag or a separate bowl/plate for coating

    For Thin Breading

    • Coat deer meat in flour/salt mixture

    For Medium Breading

    • Whisk eggs in a small bowl. Dip the pieces of deer meat, one at a time, in to the egg mixture, then in to flour (coating all of the deer).

    For Thickest Breading

    • Whisk eggs in a small bowl. Dip the pieces of deer meat, one at a time, in to the salted flour, then in to the egg mixture, and then in to flour again (coating all of the deer).

    Frying the Deer Meat

    • Place the coated deer meat pieces into the heated vegetable oil. (To test oil’s temperature, sprinkle a bit of flour in the oil to see if it bubbles. If it bubbles, it’s ready. However, be careful not to get the oil too hot, so it doesn’t splatter and burn you when adding the deer meat.)
    • Flip deer meat after a few minutes when the underside is golden-brown. (Approx. 3 minutes)
    • Cook on the alternate side until cooked through and there is no sign of undercooked meat. (We’ve been playing around with this recipe, and if you like a crunchy breading on your deer meat, cook it a bit longer until it reaches the desired “crunch,” you prefer.)
    • Inside of fully cooked meat will be gray/brown, with no sign of red.
    • Remove deer meat from pan, on to plate/dish covered with paper towels to drain oil.
    • We LOVE sprinkling Greek Seasoning on the fried deer meat after it is fried for optimal flavor!

    Video

    Nutrition

    Serving: 10pieces | Calories: 188kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 9mg | Sodium: 355mg | Potassium: 46mg | Calcium: 2mg | Iron: 0.8mg

    Cracker Barrel Country Fried Steak

    September 23, 2023

    Cracker Barrel country fried steak on black plate, next to green beans and biscuits.

    Cracker Barrel Country Fried Steak: If you cannot get enough of Cracker Barrel’s signature dish, you will love this copy-cat Cracker Barrel country fried steak recipe!

    Ready in 40 minutes, this restaurant-quality country-fried steak recipe will surely impress for a delicious breakfast! The only thing this popular dish is lacking is a trip to the Cracker Barrel Old Country Store.

    Cracker Barrel country fried steak on black plate, covered in white gravy.

    Looking for even more delicious, classic southern-style recipes? We highly recommend trying out our Biscuits and Gravy Casserole and our Southern Broccoli Casserole. Or, also save this recipe for a simple white gravy made with bacon grease, that you can also pour on these fried pork chops. Then of course don’t forget a good ole Southern Fried Chicken recipe that’s sure to please!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • It is a classic: This recipe is based on a classic restaurant-quality breakfast recipe.
    • It has simple ingredients: Odds are, aside from the cube steak, you already have most of the ingredients for this easy breakfast or dinner recipe!
    • Ready in under one hour: Recipes ready in under an hour are perfect for when you want to make something special but don’t have hours to cook.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    For Country Fried Steak

    Labeled ingredients for Cracker Barrel copycat country fried steak.
    • Cube Steak – Cube steak is a tenderized cut of beef that works best for country fried steak, however, you can use other cuts such as round steak or sirloin steak. Just make sure to tenderize the meat properly before cooking.
    • Buttermilk – You can buy this from the store or make it yourself. You can make homemade buttermilk with just two common ingredients: whole milk and white vinegar or lemon juice. Simply combine and let sit at room temperature for 15-20 minutes. During this time, the acid (vinegar or lemon juice) will cause the milk to curdle and thicken, creating a buttermilk-like consistency.

    White Gravy Recipe

    Labeled ingredients for gravy for Cracker Barrel country fried steak.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Vegetable Oil – if you would prefer using butter for this recipe instead of vegetable oil, you can! Or, I like to use ⅓ cup or so of the drippings/oil from cooking the country fried steak.
    • Meat – while cube steak is the best option for this recipe, you can make ‘poor man’s country fried steak with regular ground beef. Keep in mind that it will have a slightly different texture and not cook the same. You could also use other cuts of meat and use a meat tenderizer to flatten them and make tender steaks.

    Variations

    We do not suggest editing this recipe beyond potentially changing the meat or oil used. Using non-dairy milk, for example, will not yield the same classic Cracker Barrel country fried steak result. Stick to this recipe for the best copycat Cracker Barrel country fried steak.

    How to Make Copycat Cracker Barrel Country Fried Steak

    Making this Cracker Barrel country fried steak dupe recipe is pretty simple.

    This Cracker Barrel country fried steak is broken into 3 components:

    • preparing the steaks
    • frying the steaks
    • making the gravy

    I recommend making the gravy once all of the steaks are done so that you have the freshest gravy possible for topping.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    You are going to begin this copycat Cracker Barrel recipe by making up the flour and egg mixtures in a shallow bowl.

    Steps 1-4 on how to make Cracker Barrel's country fried steak copycat recipe.

    STEP 1. Make the flour mixture. Start your breading station and in a shallow dish, combine the flour, paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, black pepper, and salt. Mix well. (Image 1).

    STEP 2. Make egg mixture. In a separate bowl, beat the eggs and buttermilk together. (Image 2).

    STEP 3. Prepare the pan. Heat about ½ inch of vegetable oil in a large frying pan over medium-high heat. (Image 3).

    STEP 4. Coat the first steak with the flour mixture. Take one piece of cube steak and dredge it in the flour mixture, making sure to coat it evenly. Shake off any excess flour. (Image 4).

    Tip: Coat the steaks as you fry them. Do not coat it and then stick it back on a cutting board, waiting to be fried.

    Steps 5-8 on how to make Cracker Barrel country fried steak and gravy.

    STEP 5. Coat the first steak in the egg mixture. Dip the coated steak into the egg and buttermilk mixture, then dredge it in the flour mixture again, gently pressing the mixture onto the meat. Repeat with the remaining steak pieces. (Images 5 & 6).

    STEP 6-8. Fry the steaks. Use tongs to carefully place the coated steaks into the hot oil and fry for about 4-5 minutes on each side or until golden brown. You may need to cook them in batches depending on the size of your skillet. Remove the cooked steaks from the skillet and place them on a paper towel-lined plate to drain excess oil. (Images 7 & 8).

    Cracker Barrel Country Fried Steak on paper towels.

    How to Make White Gravy for Country Fried Steak

    Steps 9-12 for making white gravy for country fried steak.

    STEP 9 & 10. Begin the gravy. To make the gravy, in a separate saucepan, heat the vegetable oil over medium heat. Add the flour and whisk constantly for about 1 minute to make a roux. (Images 9 & 10).

    TIP: Sometimes I like to just use ⅓ cup or so of the oil/drippings from the country fried steak to make the gravy, in the same skillet.

    STEP 11 & 12. Complete the gravy. Gradually pour in the milk while whisking continuously to avoid lumps. Cook the gravy until it thickens and reaches your desired consistency. Season with salt and black pepper to taste, and add a dash of ground nutmeg. The gravy will continue to thicken once removed from the heat. (Images 11 & 12).

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Make the gravy last. Prepare the gravy once the steaks are done so that you have fresh gravy to serve with them.
    • Serve right away. Country fried steak is best served right away.
    • Serve with hot sauce for a kick.
    White country gravy in skillet with spoon dipped in.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use a different type of meat for country fried steak?

    Cube steak is a tenderized cut of beef that works best for country fried steak, however, you can use other cuts such as round steak or sirloin steak. Just make sure to tenderize the meat properly before cooking.

    What are some recommended side dishes to serve with country fried steak?

    If you are serving it for dinner, it pairs well with various sides such as mashed potatoes, biscuits, coleslaw, crack green beans, corn on the cob, or macaroni and cheese. You can also serve it with a side salad for a lighter option.

    What is the difference between chicken fried steak and country fried steak?

    Chicken fried steak and country fried steak are similar dishes, both typically made from a breaded and fried piece of cube steak. The main difference is that chicken fried steak is often served with a cream gravy, while country fried steak may be served with a brown or white gravy, however, most people use the names interchangeably.

    Can I cook country fried steak in the air fryer?

    Yes, you can cook country fried steak in the air fryer. We suggest cooking at 400°F for 8-10 minutes, flipping them halfway through.

    How long to fry country fried steaks?

    You should fry country fried steaks over the stovetop for 4-5 minutes in hot oil over medium-high heat.

    Copycat Cracker Barrel Country Fried Steak on black plate.

    What to Serve with Cracker Barrel Country Fried Steak

    For Breakfast: Country fried steak for breakfast pairs well with honey lime fruit salad, fluffy pancakes from scratch, or a sausage and egg casserole.

    For Dinner: Country fried steak pairs well with various sides such as mashed potatoes (or even fried potatoes), easy homemade biscuits, coleslaw, crack green beans, corn on the cob, or macaroni and tomatoes. You can also serve it with a side salad for a lighter option.

    A bite of Cracker Barrel country fried steak on a fork.

    Storage

    Store leftover country-fried steak and gravy separately in airtight containers in the refrigerator. They should be consumed within 2-3 days. Reheat the steak in the oven or toaster oven to maintain its crispiness.

    More Steak Recipes You’ll Love

    For more classic recipes using beef cuts, check out these yummy recipe ideas!

    • Crock Pot cube steak on top of mashed potatoes, sitting on white plate.
      Crock Pot Cube Steak
    • Oven Baked Steak with Butter and a side of potatoes
      How to Cook Steak in the Oven
    • steak bites in white dish with butter on top
      The BEST Steak Bites
    • Deer steaks on platter topped with butter and parsley.
      Deer Steak Recipe – On the Stovetop

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Cracker Barrel country fried steak on black plate, next to green beans and biscuits.
    Print Pin
    5 from 6 votes

    Cracker Barrel Country Fried Steak

    Cracker Barrel country fried steak is a classic and this copycat recipe packs in all of the flavor in under an hour.
    Course Breakfast, Dinner
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 499kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 4 pieces beef cube steak about 4 ounces each
    • 1 cup all-purpose flour
    • 1 teaspoon paprika
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • 1 teaspoon onion powder
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 2 large eggs
    • ½ cup buttermilk
    • vegetable oil for frying

    White Gravy

    • ⅓ cup vegetable oil or use ⅓ cup drippings/oil from country fried steak
    • ½ cup flour
    • 3 cups milk
    • Salt and pepper to taste
    • Dash of ground nutmeg

    Instructions

    • In a shallow dish, combine the flour, paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, black pepper, and salt. Mix well.
    • In a separate bowl, beat the eggs and buttermilk together.
    • Heat about ½ inch of vegetable oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat.
    • Take one piece of cube steak and dredge it in the flour mixture, making sure to coat it evenly. Shake off any excess flour.
    • Dip the coated steak into the egg and buttermilk mixture, then dredge it in the flour mixture again, gently pressing the mixture onto the meat. Repeat with the remaining steak pieces.
    • Carefully place the coated steaks into the hot oil and fry for about 4-5 minutes on each side or until golden brown. You may need to cook them in batches depending on the size of your skillet. Remove the cooked steaks from the skillet and place them on a paper towel-lined plate to drain excess oil.
    • To make the gravy, heat the oil over medium heat either in the same skillet as the steak or in a different one. Add the flour and whisk constantly for about 1 minute to make a roux.
    • Gradually pour in the milk while whisking continuously to avoid lumps. Cook the gravy until it thickens and reaches your desired consistency. Season with salt and black pepper to taste, and add a dash of ground nutmeg. The gravy will continue to thicken once removed from the heat.
    • Serve the country fried steaks with the creamy gravy poured over the top. They pair well with mashed potatoes, green beans, or biscuits.

    Video

    Notes

    • Cook gravy last in order to have freshly made gravy for the Cracker Barrel country fried steaks
    • Serve immediately

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1steak with gravy | Calories: 499kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 11g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 108mg | Sodium: 426mg | Potassium: 428mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 713IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 284mg | Iron: 3mg

    Italian Sliders (Easy Party Sandwiches)

    September 22, 2023

    Italian sliders on Hawaiian buns

    These Italian sliders are made with Italian meats, cheese, and optional banana peppers, all baked on seasoned buttered Hawaiian rolls. (Have a smoker? Smoking sliders is tasty too!)

    Italian Sliders stacked on top of one another

    Thanks to all of the 5-star reviews on these cheeseburger sliders, I knew more slider recipes were a must to add to our favorite main course and lunch recipes!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What Are Italian Sliders?

    Italian sliders are party-friendly sandwich bites made with layers of savory Italian deli meats and melty cheese. They're often baked together so the flavors meld, and while Hawaiian rolls are a popular choice for sweetness and texture, you can use regular slider buns, dinner rolls, or your favorite soft rolls.

    Not only are these Italian sliders wonderful as an easy meal but they’re the perfect snack or appetizer to make for football games, the holidays or any kind of party! (Along with these easy sloppy joe sliders and these fried chicken sliders!)

    Serve these slider sandwiches as a main dish along with a fun side dish such as or serve them as an appetizer as a potluck! If you love making fun little sandwiches, you’ll also want to take a look at these pinwheel sandwiches!

    Why You’ll Love These Italian Sandwich Sliders

    We kept the ingredients simple for these mini sandwiches so you can easily grab what you need at almost any grocery store.

    You can mix up the ingredients to suit your taste preferences if you like! See substitution ideas below!

    That Italian seasoning butter that’s brushed on the top of Hawaiian rolls before baking… now that’s something that will win your heart over, quickly.

    Ingredients

    ingredients for Italian sliders on table
    • Package of Hawaiian buns
    • 6 ounce package provolone
    • 3.5 ounces salami (I used half of a 7 oz. package)
    • 9 oz. package ham (I used thin, smoked ham but you could use black forest ham, or similar)
    • 3.5 ounces or so of pepperoni (I used half of a 7 oz. package)
    • 4 tablespoons butter
    • 1 tablespoon Italian dressing seasoning packet
    • banana peppers, optional

    See the full recipe card at the bottom of this article, to see the ingredients and instructions all in one printable card.

    Substitutions and Variations

    If you find that you’d like to substitute some of the items in this recipe, whether that’s because you can’t find them or because you have different taste preferences, that’s absolutely ok! Here are some suggestions if you need some ideas:

    • Bread: Regular rolls (instead of Hawaiian rolls)
    • Meat: You can absolutely change up the types of meats and switch them out for types such as turkey, make roast beef sliders, pastrami, etc. but using Italian meats like this recipe calls for, are perfect for Italian sliders.
    • Cheese: I chose to use provolone for these but that can easily be changed out for american, swiss, pepperjack, cheddar or your favorite cheese!
    • Banana Peppers: As mentioned in the recipe, the banana peppers are optional but they give an amazing “twang” in flavor. If you’re not a fan of banana peppers, or don’t have any on hand, you can sub for pickles, or even red onion.

    Instructions

    1. Preheat oven to 350 degrees F.
    2. Cut the Hawaiian buns in half with a serrated knife, creating a top bun and a bottom bun.
    Hawaiian rolls sliced in half.
    1. Line a baking dish (large enough to fit buns) with parchment paper.
    Provolone cheese layered on Hawaiian buns, in baking dish.
    1. Place the bottom buns on parchment paper, inside of the baking dish, and add a layer of provolone cheese on top of the bread.
    Layer of ham added on top of cheese.
    1. Next, layer the meats (ham and salami)…
    Layer of salami on top of ham, for sliders.

    … then pepperonis and then finally…

    Layer of pepperoni's added to other meats on sliders.

    … the banana peppers (if desired) across all the bottom buns.

    Banana peppers added on top of pepperoni for sliders.
    1. Then, add the top buns on the top of the peppers.
    Top of Hawaiian buns added on

    Italian Butter Glaze

    1. Melt butter in a small bowl and stir in 1 Tablespoon of the Italian seasoning mix and stir until combined.
    Butter and Italian seasoning in bowl, for bun glaze.
    1. Using a brush, brush the butter mixture on top of buns. (You may not use all of it, and you can save the remaining mixture to brush on after baking, if desired.)
    Melted butter brushed on to buns for sliders.
    1. Cover the baking dish with aluminum foil.
    Baking dish covered in aluminum foil.
    1. Bake in the oven on 350 degrees for 25 minutes, remove foil and then bake for an additional 5 minutes (if desired).
    2. If desired, brush additional melted seasoned butter on top.
    Baked Italian sliders on parchment paper, ready to be sliced.

    Once they’re baked, take a knife and cut along the lines, making 12 individual sandwiches.

    Italian sliders stacked on top of one another

    What goes well with Italian sliders?

    This hot Italian sliders recipes are the perfect appetizer but can also be served as a main dish or side dish…

    These sliders can be served as a main dish, with items such as potato chips or easy side dishes paired with them such as baked potato wedges, sweet potato fries, or something like this fresh avocado salad!

    Or, if you choose to serve these sliders as a side dish, you may want to pair them with a heart main dish such as this chili recipe, this Italian chopped salad, or even this summer pasta recipe!

    Layers of meat and peppers on hawaiian buns

    More Topping Ideas

    If more toppings are desired, here are some of our other favorites to add to these easy Italian sliders, whether that’s on the sandwich or sprinkled on top of the buns:

    • red peppers
    • lettuce
    • bacon
    • black olives
    • marinara sauce
    • parmesan cheese
    • red pepper flakes
    • fresh basil
    • dijion mustard
    • hot sauce – we used this in our buffalo chicken sliders!
    Close up of hawaiian sliders

    Storage

    If you have leftover sliders, they can be stored in an airtight container or plastic bag and stored in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.

    To reheat the sliders, they heat back up in the oven really well, or in the air fryer.

    Top Tip

    If you want to make different varieties of these Italian sliders, you can choose to do half of the sliders with certain toppings, and the other half with other meats and cheeses.

    FAQs

    Can you freeze Italian sliders?

    You can! I prefer to make them, without the butter topping, and without baking, and then freeze. Freeze in a freezer container or bag. When ready for them, I’ll bake them for about 25 minutes, remove the foil, brush on the butter, and then bake for the additional 5 minutes or until golden brown and heated through.

    Is a slider an appetizer?

    They absolutely are, however they can also be a great main dish and a wonderful side dish as well! They’re perfect for lunch or even dinner.

    How many Italian sliders are needed per person?

    This depends on how you’re serving them. If serving them as a main dish, you can count on 2-3 sliders per person. If serving them as an appetizer or side dish, 1-2 sliders per person.

    Are Italian sliders always made with Hawaiian rolls?

    Nope! While classic Hawaiian rolls are popular for their sweet texture, Italian sliders can be served on any soft roll.

    More Slider Recipes

    If you love sliders as much as we do, you’re going to love these breakfast sliders too! Or, have you ever had a salmon slider, fried fish sliders or even turkey sliders.

    More Related Recipes

    If you love easy recipes like this one, you’ll also love to see how to cook burgers in the oven and these hot ham and cheese sandwiches. They’re so delicious too!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Italian sliders on Hawaiian buns
    Print Pin
    5 from 12 votes

    Italian Sliders (Easy Party Sandwiches)

    Italian sliders layered with savory deli meats and melty cheese, baked until golden and perfect for parties, game day, or family dinners.
    Course Appetizer, Main Course, Side Dish
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 35 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 sliders
    Calories 217kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 12 count package of Hawaiian rolls
    • 6 ounce package provolone slices
    • 9 ounce package thin sliced ham
    • 3.5 ounces salami slices I used half of a 7 ounce package)
    • 3.5 ounces pepperoni give or take the amount – can be more/less
    • 1 cup sliced banana peppers optional
    • 4 tablespoons butter
    • 1 tablespoon Italian dressing seasoning

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350 degrees.
    • Cut the Hawaiian buns in half, creating a top bun and a bottom bun.
    • Line a baking dish (large enough to fit buns) with parchment paper.Place the bottom buns on parchment paper, inside of the baking dish, and add a layer of provolone cheese on top of the bread.
    • Next, layer the ham, salami and pepperoni on top of the cheese.
    • If desired, add a layer of banana peppers across the top of the meat.
    • Place the top buns on top of the banana peppers.
    • Melt the butter in a small dish and add one Tablespoon of Italian dressing seasoning, and stir to combine.
    • Brush butter across the tops of all the buns. (There may be some butter leftover, but this is perfect to brush on the buns after baking.)
    • Cover the baking dish with aluminum foil and place the baking dish in the oven and bake for 25 minutes.
    • Remove the foil after 25 minutes, and bake for an additional 5 minutes or until golden brown.
    • Remove sliders from oven and brush on more seasoned butter. Serve!

    Notes

    How many sliders per person?
    This depends on how you’re serving them. If serving them as a main dish, you can count on 2-3 sliders per person. If serving them as an appetizer or side dish, 1-2 sliders per person.
    Leftover sliders: If you have leftover sliders, they can be stored in an airtight container or plastic bag and stored in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 3sliders | Calories: 217kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 48mg | Sodium: 742mg | Potassium: 162mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 276IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 114mg | Iron: 1mg

    Red Velvet Cake Brownie Recipe

    September 21, 2023

    Red velvet brownies stacked on top of one another.

    It is SO EASY to make Red Velvet Brownies from a cake mix! You wouldn’t think a fluffy cake could turn into chewy, fudgy brownies, but it is quick and delicious.

    When these strawberry brownies went over so well, we knew that more cake mix brownies had to be made! It may just become your new favorite way to make brownie recipes for an easy dessert.

    Stack of red velvet brownies on white plate.

    I love using pantry ingredients for desserts. This way you always have something yummy on hand that you just need to mix and bake. Cake mix isn’t just for cake (or brownies!) – you can easily turn a cake mix into an amazing peach cobbler. Another fun classic is making Funfetti Cookies – the kids will love these colorful cookies.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Red Velvet Cake Brownie Recipe

    • It uses a few ingredients: With only 5 ingredients, this recipe uses standard baking items you likely always have on hand.
    • Make-ahead recipe: Brownies freeze beautifully and retain their texture when thawed, so you can make these well in advance.
    • Customize your favorite: Swap out the chocolate or extract to make a new combo you’ll fall in love with.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for red velvet brownies.
    • Cake mix – Look for a standard red velvet cake mix from a brand you enjoy eating.
    • Eggs – Room temperature eggs will mix in the best.
    • Butter – I usually grab unsalted when baking, but the difference is negligible so use whatever you have on hand.
    • Vanilla – A classic flavor to amp up the cake mix.
    • White Chocolate Chips – The bright white really pops against the pretty red brownies.

    Variations

    You can easily mix things up here! Whether you don’t want to go to the store and need to use what you have, or you ARE at the store and see a new flavor of cake, grab it and go.

    • Mint Chocolate – Try Devil’s Food for super dark brownies, and add in mint extract with chopped candy canes. (Or we use a brownie mix for these mint brownies.)
    • Autumn Fun – Grab a spice cake mix plus cinnamon baking chips.
    • Plain Jane Vanilla – Nothing’s boring about classic vanilla when mixed with dark chocolate chips.
    • PB Chocolate – Chocolate cake plus peanut butter chips? Yes, please! Chocolate peanut butter brownies are hard to beat!
    • Frosting – Another great option is to stir in all the white chocolate, then top with your favorite cream cheese frosting once cooled.

    How to Make Cake Mix Red Velvet Brownies

    Line your baking dish with parchment paper, making sure to leave an overhang. This is key to removing the entire pan of brownies for easy slicing. Preheat the oven before beginning.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Steps 1-4 of red velvet brownies with a cake mix.

    STEP 1. Mix it up. Add all ingredients except the chocolate chips to a large mixing bowl (Image 1).

    Tip: Make sure you let your melted butter cool down before adding to the mix. You don’t want it to cook your eggs!

    STEP 2. Combine well. Mix well until fully combined. (Image 2). This is a super thick batter and you want it to be smooth and all one color.

    STEP 3. Chips and bits. Add in all but a handful of chips and stir to combine (Image 3).

    STEP 4. Spread and top. Spread the thick batter in the prepared baking pan and smooth over the top. Add the remaining chips on top (Image 4).

    Baked red velvet brownies in a white baking pan.

    STEP 5. Bake. Bake until the top is no longer shiny and wet. You can check with a thermometer. Let cool before slicing.

    Red velvet brownies cut in to squares on white parchment paper.

    Tips for Red Velvet Cake Brownies

    • Line your pan. It’s much easier to cut neat brownies outside of the pan – and the best way to achieve that is with a paper sling to lift the brownies out.
    • Correct temperature. Make sure your butter and eggs are at room temperature. If the butter is too hot the eggs are in peril and if the eggs are too cold, they don’t mix in as well.
    Close-up of red velvet brownies.

    Recipe FAQs

    Do I need to line my pan?

    It’s not completely necessary, but it makes for a better presentation. To ensure they won’t stick in the pan, I prefer to line with parchment and leave an overhang to remove the entire baked tray at once. This will make for easier cutting on a cutting board! If you prefer, you can grease the pan really well and slice in the pan.

    What’s the difference between dense and cakey brownies?

    Dense or fudgy brownies often contain more fat and almost always start with melted butter for proper texture. Some recipes might even add an extra egg yolk to the whole egg. If you prefer lighter brownies that are more like cake, these will generally have a bit more flour than dense brownies, and oftentimes baking powder is added.

    What is the difference between cake and brownie mix?

    Cake mix contains more leavening agents, to ensure the texture is light and fluffy. However, we are using fewer eggs than the box calls for when making cake, which counteracts some of that action. This gives us the best fudgy texture we want!

    Storage

    • Countertop. Once the red velvet cake brownies have cooled completely, cover the baking dish with plastic wrap or slice the brownies and transfer them to an airtight container. Store them on the counter for up to 4 days. 
    • Refrigerator. If you want your brownies to last a little longer, allow them to cool to room temperature before slicing them into squares. Transfer the brownies to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to 1 week. 
    • Freezer. Wrap each individual brownie in a layer of plastic wrap followed by a layer of aluminum foil. Seal the brownies in a large Ziplock bag and store them in the freezer for up to 3 months. Allow the brownies to thaw at room temperature before diving in. 

    Did you know that you can make brownies in the Instant Pot too? It’s true! If you have an Instant Pot, you should give this Instant Pot brownies recipe a try too.

    More Boxed Mix Delights

    • Red Velvet Cake Mix Cookies
      Red Velvet Cake Mix Cookies
    • Brownie mix cookies stacked on top of one another
      Brownie Mix Cookies
    • Lemon Brownies Recipe with cake mix
      Lemon Cake Mix Brownies
    • Strawberry brownies on white marble cutting board.
      Strawberry Brownies Recipe

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Red velvet brownies stacked on top of one another.
    Print Pin
    5 from 5 votes

    Red Velvet Cake Brownie Recipe

    It is SO EASY to make Red Velvet Brownie from cake mix! You wouldn't think a fluffy cake could turn into chewy, fudgy brownies, but it is quick and delicious.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 30 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 brownies
    Calories 356kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 box red velvet cake mix
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 2 eggs room temperature
    • ½ cup butter melted and cooled
    • 1 ½ cups white chocolate chips

    Instructions

    • Prep. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F and line an 8 X 8-inch baking dish with parchment paper. Alternatively, ditch the parchment paper and opt for non-stick cooking spray instead.
    • Make the batter. Mix together the cake mix, vanilla, eggs, and butter. Once that's combined well and smooth. fold in all but a handful of the white chocolate chips. The batter will be thick.
    • Bake. Smooth the batter into the prepared baking dish. The batter is very thick so you'll need to smooth it out to the corners and then smooth the top. Bake it uncovered for 25 minutes.
    • Check to make sure it's done with a thermometer inserted into the center of the dish, if it has reached 165 degrees f they are baked! If you like your brownies a bit more done you can bake another 5 minutes. Once out of the oven, while still hot, sprinkle the remaining hand full of white chocolate chips over the top.
    • Cool. Allow the brownies to cool in the baking dish before slicing and serving.

    Notes

    • Always line your pan for easy removal!
    • Make sure your eggs are room temp for easy mixing.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1brownie | Calories: 356kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 52mg | Sodium: 389mg | Potassium: 197mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 27g | Vitamin A: 284IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 105mg | Iron: 2mg

    Sloppy Joe Sliders

    September 20, 2023

    Sloppy joe sliders with melted cheese on white marble cutting board

    Sloppy Joe Sliders: Taking classic sloppy joes and making cheesy sloppy joe sliders. The perfect appetizer for a party or even a quick and easy dinner idea on a busy night!

    Quick Overview: Just a few simple, everyday ingredients, and in only 25 minutes, you’re ready to eat! It’s one of our favorite 30-minute or less dinner ideas.

    Sloppy Joe Sliders with cheese, on white marble table

    It’s safe to say that we’re obsessed with slider recipes around here because I can’t stop making them!

    They’re perfect for hosting a party and even perfect for a main course or easy lunch idea! (But let’s not forget even Hawaiian roll breakfast sliders too!)

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love These

    • Canned Sloppy Joe Sauce: I really thought about creating a homemade sloppy joe sauce for these but I’ll be honest… I’ve made homemade sauce multiple times but our family simply prefers the Manwich sloppy joe sauce. Plus, I know how much you love shortcuts in the kitchen and any kind of timesaver, so canned sauce it is!
    • Perfect for a Crowd: There are many times when you need an appetizer ready for a party or need to bring a dish along somewhere, and it’s hard to think of something that will be a crowd-pleaser. But this… this sloppy joe sliders recipe is going to be loved by all!
    • The Glaze: Although you can leave the rolls plain, and they’re still absolutely delicious, the glaze takes the little sandwiches to a whole new level.
    • The Size: Perfect for little hands, or even a large crowd on game day, these are a great party snack so guests can grab and go and easily add it to their plate of food!

    Ingredients

    As you can see, the ingredients are simple, and you should be able to pick them up at your local grocery store.

    Ingredients for sloppy joe sliders on table

    Complete list of ingredients and amounts can be found in the recipe card below.

    Sloppy Joe Ingredients:

    • Ground Beef: We use ground hamburger for the sloppy joe meat. You can use a ratio of beef but if you use a fatty beef, you’ll need to drain it for sure. But you can find great substitutions below! Or, keep these other ground beef dinners in mind too.
    • Hawaiian Rolls: We choose the rolls that are on the sweeter side but you can use regular dinner rolls or slider buns. The glaze (salty and tangy) combined with the sweet rolls is what makes the combo of these sloppy joe sliders on Hawaiian rolls, out of this world!
    • Sloppy Joe Sauce: We’re huge fans of Manwich around here but you can use any canned sauce you prefer or even your own homemade sloppy joe sauce recipe! (Or, we’ve even really liked using barbecue sauce instead of sloppy joe sauce, or have fallen in love with this Asian sloppy joe sauce recipe too.
    • American Cheese: You can have fun with the type of melted cheese you choose but we use sliced American cheese for these. That smooth, creamy texture is incredible with the sloppy joe meat and buns. See the substitutions below of what you may want to use instead if this isn’t an option.

    Glaze Ingredients:

    • Butter: Melting the butter, and combining it with the ingredients below, makes a tangy sauce for the top of the buns. We did this with our cheeseburger sliders but only used butter and garlic salt, so that’s an option as well.
    • Dijon Mustard: The dijon mustard gives the glaze the tang on top of the rolls.
    • Worcestershire: Our favorite Worcestershire sauce is Lea & Perrin’s. It wasn’t until a few years ago that I thought all Worcestershire sauce was the same… but it’s not. The first time I tasted it, it was off-brand and I never used it again… until I had Lea & Perrin’s. Now it’s all I use.
    • Garlic Powder: We love putting this on almost everything, so we couldn’t leave it out on this slider recipe! It would even be really good in these cheeseburger subs, too!
    • Brown Sugar: Combing that sweet with the tangy is key for the flavor in these! If the Hawaiian rolls are already almost too sweet for you, then you can omit this sugar.

    Ingredients for Tops of the Buns

    • Parmesan Cheese: Definitely not mandatory but what a lovely presentation it gives on top of the buns!
    • Sesame Seeds: Loving the crunch that these small seeds give on top of the buns. If you don’t have them, that’s absolutely ok but if you do, then I recommend using them for sure.
    • Crushed Red Pepper: Totally optional but recommended. If you’re worried about the kiddos eating them, my kids ate them, loved them, and didn’t say anything about it being too spicy! Now, I think I’ll be putting them on the Italian slider sandwiches too!

    Instructions

    1. Begin by browning and cooking your ground beef in a large skillet, over medium-high heat. When it is fully cooked, you may need to drain the grease and add the cooked beef back in to the pan.
    Ground beef in enameled cast iron skillet.
    1. Pour in the sloppy joe sauce and stir to combine.
    Cooked ground beef in skillet with sloppy joe sauce
    1. Let the meat mixture simmer over low heat for a few minutes. (You do this so the flavor can really cook in to the meat and the sauce can warm up.)
    Sloppy joe sauce mixed in with beef
    1. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees.
    2. Line a baking dish (or a cookie sheet or baking sheet will do too) with parchment paper or a Silpat mat. (I love my Silpat mat, as I think the bottoms turn out so much better, with whatever I’m baking!)
    3. Using a bread knife, cut the Hawaiian rolls in half, horizontally, creating one half that’s the top of the buns and a lower half, creating the bottom of the buns.
    Hawaiian rolls cut in half, laying on counter.

    Place the bottom buns in the baking tray.

    Bottom layer of Hawaiian rolls in baking dish.
    1. Next, spoon all of the beef mixture on to the bottom buns that are in the pan.
    Sloppy joes on bottom layer of sliders.
    1. Then, layer the cheese on top of the warm meat. (We used really thin American cheese slices so we did a couple of layers of cheese but if you have thicker slices, one layer may do just fine!)
    Layer of American cheese on sloppy joes.
    1. Place the top half of the buns on top of the cheese.
    Top layer of Hawaiian buns on top of sloppy joes
    1. In a small, microwavable dish (I used a one-cup glass measuring cup) add the butter, garlic powder, Worcestershire sauce, dijon mustard, and brown sugar.
    2. Microwave for about 30 seconds or until butter is melted. Stir to combine.
    Melted butter and seasonings in glass measuring bowl.
    1. Using a pastry brush (or if you don’t have one, you can gently pour over buns, as evenly as possible) spread the buttery mixture over the top of the buns.
    Brush, spreading butter mixture on rolls.
    1. Next, sprinkle sesame seeds, parmesan cheese, and red pepper flakes across the top of the rolls.
    Seasonings and toppings added on to top of Hawaiian buns.
    1. Cover the pan with aluminum foil, place in preheated oven, and bake for 15 minutes (removing the aluminum foil at 14 minutes to “toast” the tops of the buns for the remaining minute).
    Baked sloppy joe sliders in baking dish.

    The cheese should be melted and the tops of the buns looking a slight golden brown.

    Close up of sloppy joe sliders with melted cheese.
    1. Remove the Silpat mat or parchment paper from baking dish, carefully lifting the sloppy joe sandwiches out, on to the table or counter so they can be sliced easily.
    Sloppy joe sliders on silpat mat, on counter
    1. Using a bread knife, gently slice the buns, cutting along the lines of the rolls, and creating individual sliders.
    Individual sloppy joey sliders on white marble board

    Substitutions

    • Meat – If you’re not a fan of ground beef or simply have another type of meat on hand, you can easily make these using ground chicken (we use shredded chicken in the buffalo chicken sliders), ground turkey, venison, elk, etc.
    • Bread – Feel free to use dinner rolls, savory butter rolls, or even slider buns! They’ll all work just fine!
    • Cheese – Although we love American cheese on these, you can use shredded cheddar cheese, Monterey Jack cheese, pepper jack or your favorite for hot sandwiches!
    • Mustard – If you don’t have dijon mustard, you can use honey mustard, regular ground mustard or spicy mustard.

    Storage

    Due to the “wetness” of the sloppy joe mixture, some may not enjoy these sliders’ leftover. However, if you decide to try them, place them (when fully cooled) in an airtight container in the refrigerator, up to 3-4 days.

    Can you freeze leftover sliders?

    Yes! I wrapped the already-cooked sliders in Press’n Seal and then in a freezer Ziploc bag and froze them to enjoy later, and they turned out amazing, and tasted exactly like they did the day I made them. So making these sliders ahead of time as a freezer meal for meal planning later, is a great idea!

    I tested out reheating leftover sliders that I already baked once but don’t see why you couldn’t freeze premade sliders before baking as well. However, I’d wait to brush the tops with butter until right before baking, if freezing to bake later since you wouldn’t be baking the butter in before freezing.

    How to Reheat:

    Allow leftover sliders to thaw in the refrigerator overnight (however I’ve placed them on the counter in the morning and they were thawed by lunchtime too).

    • Preheat oven to 350 degrees.
    • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper
    • Unwrap and place sliders on parchment paper
    • Cover with aluminum foil
    • Bake, covered, at 350 degrees for 20-25 minutes or until heated through.
    • Remove the aluminum foil for the last minute to toast the buns.

    Top Tip

    Make the sloppy joe mixture and buttery glaze in advance, store them in separate containers, and then quickly put together these sliders later, right before serving!

    FAQs

    What goes with Sloppy Joe sliders?

    Easy side dishes like french fries, chips with a dip recipe, a side salad, Amish potato salad, or a delicious pasta salad recipe, go great with these sliders!

    What is the difference between Manwich and sloppy joes?

    Manwich is a store-bought version of premade sloppy joey sauce. It’s not only easier to simply pour a can of sauce in but the flavor is fantastic!

    What should I put on my sloppy joe?

    Melted cheese, pickles, crispy onions, diced onions, and green peppers are fun toppings to add if desired.

    Sloppy Joe Sliders with Cheese on counter

    Related Recipes

    If you love sliders and sandwiches, then you’ll always want to try our Turkey and Cranberry Sliders, these Crispy Fried Chicken Sliders, and our Hot Ham and Cheese Sandwiches!

    These salmon sliders are hearty enough for great dinner, much like these roast beef sliders too!

    But if this is your first time here, make sure you check out our most popular recipe and favorite cooking method for “How to Cook Burgers in the Oven – with a Trick!”

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Sloppy joe sliders with melted cheese on white marble cutting board
    Print Pin
    5 from 11 votes

    Sloppy Joe Sliders

    Sloppy Joe Sliders: Taking classic sloppy joes and making cheesy sloppy joe sliders. The perfect appetizer for a party or even a quick and easy dinner idea on a busy night!
    Course Appetizer, Main Course, Side Dish, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 sliders
    Calories 290kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Sloppy Joes

    • 1 pound ground beef
    • 15 ounce can of Manwich
    • 9 slices American cheese
    • 12 Hawaiian slider rolls Kings Hawaiian are our favorite

    Glaze

    • ¼ cup butter
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • 1 teaspoon dijon mustard
    • 1 teaspoon Worcestershire sauce Use Lea & Perrins, trust me! Better than others!
    • 1 Tablespoon brown sugar

    Topping

    • 1 teaspoon sesame seeds
    • 1 teaspoon grated parmesan cheese
    • ½ crushed red pepper flakes optional

    Instructions

    • Begin by browning and cooking your ground beef in a large skillet, over medium-high heat. When it is fully cooked, you may need to drain the grease and add the cooked beef back in to the pan.
    • Pour in the sloppy joe sauce and stir to combine.
    • Let the meat mixture simmer over low heat for a few minutes. (You do this so the flavor can really cook in to the meat and the sauce can warm up.)
    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees.
    • Line a baking dish with parchment paper.
    • Using a bread knife, cut the Hawaiian rolls in half, horizontally, creating one half that's the top of the buns and a lower half, creating the bottom of the buns. Place the bottom buns in the baking tray.
    • Next, spoon all of the beef mixture on to the bottom buns that are in the pan.
    • Then, layer the cheese on top of the warm meat.
    • Place the top half of the buns on top of the cheese.
    • In a small, microwavable dish add the butter, garlic powder, Worcestershire sauce, dijon mustard, and brown sugar and Microwave for about 30 seconds or until butter is melted. Stir to combine.
    • Using a pastry brush (or if you don't have one, you can gently pour over buns, as evenly as possible) spread the buttery mixture over the top of the buns.
    • Next, sprinkle sesame seeds, parmesan cheese, and red pepper flakes across the top of the rolls.
    • Cover the pan with aluminum foil, place in preheated oven, and bake for 15 minutes (removing the aluminum foil at 14 minutes to "toast" the tops of the buns for the remaining minute).
    • Remove the Silpat mat or parchment paper from baking dish, carefully lifting the sloppy joe sandwiches out, on to the table or counter so they can be sliced easily.
    • Using a bread knife, gently slice the buns, cutting along the lines of the rolls, and creating individual sliders. Enjoy!

    Video

    Notes

    Make-Ahead Tip:
    Make the sloppy joe mixture and buttery glaze in advance, store them in separate containers and then quickly put together these sliders later, right before serving!

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slider | Calories: 290kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 63mg | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 238mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 426IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 184mg | Iron: 1mg

    Cinnamon Biscuits

    September 19, 2023

    Stack of cinnamon biscuits on white plate.

    Cinnamon Biscuits: Super quick and easy, these are great for breakfast or dessert. It’s a sweet version of a savory biscuit recipe, that may be on your table a lot in the future.

    Stack of cinnamon biscuits on white plate.

    Next to traditional cinnamon rolls that you can make in the air fryer (or even these Oreo Cinnamon Rolls) they’re a sweet treat that will win your heart.

    Creative breakfast recipes are my jam (ha!) and some of my favorites that are just as easy as these cinnamon biscuits are this cinnamon roll casserole and these sheet pan cinnamon swirl pancakes.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love These Cinnamon Biscuits

    • It’s quick: Coming together in less than twenty minutes, these fluffy biscuits make for a wonderfully fast breakfast option.
    • Make-ahead recipe: It would be simple enough to make a big batch of these cinnamon biscuits and then serve them throughout the week.
    • They’re versatile: You can change up the original recipe with quite a few add-ins!

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for cinnamon biscuits.
    • Flour – We used all-purpose flour for this recipe.
    • Milk – We used 2% milk for this recipe but you could easily swap that out for your favorite milk option.
    • Unsalted butter – make sure to use unsalted butter and not salted to get the right flavor in your biscuits.

    See the recipe card below for the full list of ingredient amounts and instructions.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Milk – if you have a dairy allergy, or you’re just dairy-free, feel free to swap in a milk alternative.
    • Sugar – feel free to use any kind of sugar you’d like for this recipe (brown sugar would be a great option)!

    Variations

    • Add-ins – we recommend adding chopped pecans, raisins, or walnuts to the biscuits if you’re looking for an upgrade.

    How to Make Easy Cinnamon Biscuits

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Steps 1-4 how to make cinnamon biscuits.

    STEP 1. Measure Liquids. Measure out the milk and add the vanilla to the milk, stir to combine, and set aside (Image 1).

    STEP 2. Combine Cinnamon and Sugar. In a small bowl, add the sugar and cinnamon, stir to combine, and set aside (Image 2).

    STEP 3. Start Adding Dry Ingredients to the Food Processor. Add the flour, baking powder, cream of tartar, salt, and 1 tablespoon of sugar to the bowl of your food processor. Pulse 3-4 times to mix everything together (Image 1).

    STEP 4. Add Butter. Add the cold cubed butter to the food processor with the flour mixture and pulse until the biscuit dough resembles coarse crumbs, about 6 times (Image 1).

    Tip: Take butter directly out of the fridge for this step. Do not let butter warm up to room temperature!

    Step by step of how to make cinnamon biscuits.

    STEP 5. Add in the Milk and Vanilla. Slowly add the milk/vanilla mixture to the flour mixture. Pulsing to combine the ingredients making sure not to over-mix the dough (Image 2).

    STEP 6. Check Dough. Dough should now be crumbly and ready to press together (Image 2).

    STEP 7. Add to a Floured Surface. Once the dough has just come together but you still see some crumbs not attached, turn the dough out onto a lightly floured surface (Image 2).

    STEP 8. Roll Out the Dough. Bring the dough together and roll out the dough so it's about 1 inch thick. Sprinkle a small portion of the cinnamon sugar over the top of the dough (Image 2).

    Cinnamon biscuit tutorial in steps.

    STEP 8-12. Fold the Dough. Fold the dough into thirds making sure to sprinkle more cinnamon sugar over the area that doesn't have any cinnamon sugar on it (Image 3).

    Steps 13- 16 of how to make cinnamon biscuits.

    STEP 13-14. Roll Out Again and Cut Out Biscuits. Roll the dough out to 1 inch thick again and sprinkle the remaining amount of cinnamon sugar over the top. Cut the dough into 2-inch biscuits with a biscuit cutter or pastry cutter (Image 4). When you run out of dough to cut into, gently bring the dough together and cut out a few more biscuits.

    STEP 14. Place Cinnamon Biscuits on Sheet Pan and Bake. Place them on the prepared baking sheet (Image 4). Bake at 450 degrees F (or 232 degrees C) for 8 minutes or until the top is golden brown.

    STEP 15-16. Make the Simple Glaze. While the biscuits are baking, add the powdered sugar and the remaining milk to a bowl. Stir to combine (Image 4).

    STEP 17. Drizzle Icing. When the biscuits are done baking, drizzle the vanilla glaze icing over top and serve immediately.

    Baked cinnamon biscuits, stacked on top of each other.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why are my cinnamon biscuits dry?

    If your biscuits come out dry it might mean that you didn't add enough fat or liquid. Make sure that the dough is coming together and staying together when cutting the biscuits. If they're crumbling while you're shaping them, more milk is needed.

    What does adding cream of tartar to biscuits do?

    Adding cream of tartar to biscuits helps stabilize and enhance the structure of the dough. It also acts as an acid, reacting with baking soda to help the biscuits rise better and offer more flaky layers.

    Are biscuits better made with butter or Crisco?

    Biscuits made with butter tend to have a richer flavor and a slightly crumbly texture, while those made with Crisco or a similar vegetable shortening can yield a more tender and flaky result. The choice between butter and Crisco depends on personal preference.

    What makes a high-quality cinnamon biscuit?

    A high-quality biscuit is characterized by a delicate balance of a tender, flaky interior and a golden, slightly crisp exterior. It should have a rich, buttery flavor, a light rise, and be seasoned just right, providing a yummy blend of texture and taste in every bite.

    Spooning icing on top of cinnamon biscuits.

    What to Serve with this Easy Cinnamon Biscuits Recipe

    This recipe, while great on its own for breakfast, would be even better paired with this honey lime fruit salad or this fruit salad with Cool Whip!

    Bite taken out of cinnamon biscuits with glaze dripping down.

    Storage

    Store any leftover cinnamon biscuits in an airtight container and store at room temperature for up to 3 days or in the fridge for 4 days.

    If you store the leftovers in the fridge, before serving I recommend warming them in the microwave for 20-30 seconds.

    More Easy Breakfast Recipes You’ll Love

    Check out these yummy easy breakfast options similar to this cinnamon biscuits recipe for a delicious morning meal!

    • Bagel French Toast casserole in the crock pot.
      Crock Pot Bagel French Toast Casserole
    • Crock Pot rice pudding in small bowl.
      Crock Pot Rice Pudding
    • White gravy recipe on top of biscuits next to bacon on a vintage plate.
      White Gravy Recipe
    • A slice of Amish applesauce cake on plate with fork.
      Amish Applesauce Cake

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Stack of cinnamon biscuits on white plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 5 votes

    Cinnamon Biscuits

    These cinnamon biscuits are a quick and easy recipe that can be served for breakfast or dessert. A buttery biscuit base with the addition of cinnamon sugar layers and topped with a simple icing to take these biscuits to the next level.
    Course Breakfast, Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 8 minutes minutes
    Cooling Time 3 minutes minutes
    Total Time 16 minutes minutes
    Servings 9 Biscuits
    Calories 304kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • 1 Food Processor

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups All-Purpose Flour
    • 1 tablespoon Baking Powder
    • ½ teaspoon Cream of Tartar
    • ½ teaspoon Salt
    • ½ cup Unsalted Butter cubed and cold
    • ⅔ cup Milk
    • 2 tablespoons Milk
    • 1 teaspoon Vanilla
    • ½ cup Sugar
    • 1 tablespoon Cinnamon
    • 1 cup Powdered Sugar

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F (or 232 degrees C).
    • Line a baking sheet with a piece of parchment paper and set aside.
    • Measure out the milk and add the vanilla to the milk, stir to combine, and set aside.
    • In a small bowl, add the sugar and cinnamon, stir to combine, and set aside.
    • Add the flour, baking powder, cream of tartar, salt, and 1 tablespoon of sugar to the bowl of your food processor. Pulse 3-4 times to mix everything together.
    • Add the cold cubed butter to the food processor and pulse until the mixture resembles coarse crumbs, about 6 times.
    • Slowly add the milk/vanilla mixture to the flour mixture. Pulsing to combine the ingredients making sure not to over-mix the dough.
    • Once the dough has just come together but you still see some crumbs not attached, turn the dough out onto a lightly floured surface.
    • Bring the dough together and roll out the dough so it's about 1 inch thick. Sprinkle a small portion of the cinnamon sugar over the top of the dough.
    • Fold the dough into thirds making sure to sprinkle more cinnamon sugar over the area that doesn't have any cinnamon sugar on it.
    • Roll the dough out to 1 inch thick again and sprinkle the remaining amount of cinnamon sugar over the top.
    • Cut the dough into 2-inch biscuits placing them on the prepared baking sheet.
    • When you run out of dough to cut into, gently bring the dough together and cut out a few more biscuits.
    • Bake at 450 degrees F (or 232 degrees C) for 8 minutes or until the top is golden brown.
    • While the biscuits are baking, add the powdered sugar and the remaining milk to a bowl. Stir to combine.
    • When the biscuits are done baking, drizzle the icing over top and serve immediately.

    Notes

    2% milk was used, you can use whatever milk you have on hand.
    Buttermilk can be used in substitution of the 2% milk.
    Recommended add-ins could be:
    • Chopped pecans
    • Raisins
    • Walnuts

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1Biscuit | Calories: 304kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 30mg | Sodium: 141mg | Potassium: 232mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 25g | Vitamin A: 353IU | Vitamin C: 0.03mg | Calcium: 101mg | Iron: 1mg

    How to Cook Sausage Patties in the Oven

    September 17, 2023

    Cooked sausage patty being held by tongs.

    Are you a sausage lover and a fan of sausage patties but dread the mess of cooking them on the stove? This recipe will guide you on how to cook sausage patties in the oven, a method that’s not only hassle-free but also incredibly delicious. Have sausage links? Breakfast sausage links are cooked a bit differently in time but similar in the process.

    Baked sausage patty being held by tongs.

    Juicy, perfectly cooked sausage patties with a beautiful brown color, all achieved in the convenience of your oven, like when we cook Italian sausages in the oven, baked hot dogs, or even bratwursts in the oven.

    The secret is in the even heating of the oven, which cooks the patties to perfection without the splatter or need for constant flipping. Stick around, and you’ll soon be on your way to creating the most irresistible sausage patties in the oven for an easy breakfast (or for any other meal)!

    Looking for more ideas on how to cook in the oven and leave the stove off for the night? Check out this guide on The BEST Hamburgers in the Oven to start with. Then if you fancy a steak night, try this process for How to Cook Steak in the Oven. 

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Cuts back on the mess: Cooking sausage patties in the oven is so much less messy than cooking them on the stove.
    • Works for other patties: You can also use the same method to cook other types of patties in the oven.
    • Ready in only 20 minutes: Cooking in the oven is a little slower but they will still be ready in less than 20 minutes.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted the only ingredient below with some relevant notes.

    Store-bought, packaged sausage patties, sitting on the kitchen counter.
    • Patties – Use your favorite pork sausage patties for this recipe then you can serve them any way you like.

    Equipment

    You’ll need a baking sheet large enough to space out the patties so that they aren’t touching. Cover this with parchment paper to stop them from sticking to the pan.

    If you don’t have a traditional baking sheet, don’t fret! There are a few other types of baking pans that can work just as well for making oven-baked sausage patties:

    • Roasting Pan: These come with a rack that allows for heat to circulate all around the patties, ensuring an even cook and that beautiful brown color we love.
    • Cast Iron Skillet: This sturdy pan holds heat very well, which can give your sausage patties a nice sear while they cook in the oven.
    • Silicone Baking Mat: If you don’t have parchment paper, try a reusable silicone baking mat. It’s non-stick and can easily fit into any baking sheet or pan you have. The best part is it makes for an easy cleanup.

    How to Make Sausage Patties in the Oven

    This process is broken into 2 components:

    • Prepare the baking sheet
    • Cook the patties and serve

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    STEP 1: Heat the oven. Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.

    STEP 2: Arrange the meat. Arrange the sausage patties on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper, ensuring they are not touching each other.

    Raw sausage breakfast patties on baking sheet, on top of parchment paper.

    STEP 3: Cook the patties. Preheat the oven to 400 degrees and bake for 15-20 minutes, flipping halfway through. For that perfect golden look, broil them for the last couple of minutes.

    Breakfast sausage patties baked in the oven on the baking sheet.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Monitor the broiling closely: For the best results when broiling the sausage patties for that perfect golden brown look, keep a close eye on them to prevent burning. Everyone’s oven is different, and they can go from golden to burnt in no time.
    • Flipping Patties: Use a spatula or tongs for flipping the patties. This will ensure that they don’t break apart and retain their shape.
    • Variety Matters: It’s a good idea to experiment with different types of sausage patties. Each variety yields its unique texture and flavor when cooked in the oven.
    • Spice It Up: If you prefer your sausage patties a bit spicy, consider adding a dash of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes before cooking. 
    • Don’t Overcrowd: Ensure the raw sausage patties are not touching each other on the baking sheet. This allows for even cooking and browning.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use this oven method for cooking frozen sausage patties?

    Yes, absolutely. You can cook frozen sausage patties in the oven without thawing them first. However, you may need to extend the cooking time by a few minutes

    How can I tell when my sausage patties are cooked completely in the oven?

    The best way to ensure your sausage patties are cooked thoroughly is to use a meat thermometer. The internal temperature of the patties should reach 160 degrees Fahrenheit. 

    Can I use aluminum foil instead of parchment paper?

    Yes, you can indeed use aluminum foil if you don’t have parchment paper. However, for the best non-stick results, consider lightly greasing the aluminum foil with a little bit of oil or cooking spray.

    What other seasonings can be used on sausage patties?

    The beauty of homemade sausage patties is the flexibility in seasoning. You can use herbs like sage, thyme, rosemary, black pepper, or spices like garlic powder, onion powder, or smoked paprika. 

    Why are my sausage patties sticking to the pan even though I used parchment paper?

    This could happen if the oven temperature is too low or if the patties are not flipped halfway through the cooking process. Make sure to flip the patties and increase the oven temperature slightly if needed.

    What to Serve with Sausage Patties

    Sausage patties are incredibly versatile and can be paired with a multitude of dishes. Here are a few serving suggestions:

    1. Breakfast Platter: Serve the sausage patties alongside scrambled eggs, crispy hash browns, and fresh fruits for a hearty breakfast.
    2. Patty Sandwich: Place a hot sausage patty between two slices of toasty bread, add a slice of cheese, and you have a quick and yummy breakfast sandwich and an easy meal. These Hawaiian roll breakfast sliders are a great recipe for sausage patties!
    3. Patties and Pancakes: For a sweet and savory combination, serve these patties with fluffy pancakes drizzled with maple syrup. 
    4. Sausage and Salad: If you’re looking for a lighter option, pair the sausage patties with a fresh garden salad.
    5. Biscuits and Gravy: Incorporate the sausage patties into a classic southern dish, 3-ingredient biscuits and classic white gravy. A generous dollop of sausage gravy on top of a flaky biscuit, alongside our oven-baked sausage patties, is a match made in heaven. This biscuit and gravy casserole uses ground sausage but can be a great way to use sausage patties too.

    Remember, the beauty of this recipe is its versatility, so feel free to get creative and pair these sausage patties with your favorite dishes!

    Storage

    Leftovers: Storing cooked sausage patties is incredibly simple and convenient. Allow the patties to cool completely before storing them. Once cooled, you can place them in an airtight container or a zip-top freezer bag. They will last in the refrigerator for up to four days. 

    Can you freeze sausage patties? Yes, you can absolutely freeze cooked sausage patties! This is a fantastic way to have a quick and delicious meal option on hand. To freeze the patties, lay them flat in a single layer on a baking sheet and place them in the freezer for one to two hours, or until they're fully frozen. Once frozen, transfer them to a freezer-safe bag or container. Be sure to squeeze out any excess air to prevent freezer burn. 

    Frozen cooked sausage patties can be kept in the freezer for up to two months.

    Thaw: When you’re ready to enjoy them, thaw them in the refrigerator overnight and reheat them in the oven or microwave.

    More Sausage Recipes You’ll Love

    If you still have the urge for more delicious recipes with sausage, then next time go beyond the patties! You could try this Easy Sausage Pasta Bake recipe as a great evening meal for the whole family. Or you could make some Breakfast Pigs in a Blanket as a fun breakfast option that the kids will love.

    • Jalapeno Sausage Gravy
      Jalapeno Sausage Gravy
    • Sausage Casserole in Slow Cooker, with a spoonful up above crock pot.
      Sausage Casserole in the Slow Cooker
    • sausage and egg casserole being lifted out of baking dish
      Sausage and Egg Casserole
    • Slice of bacon and sausage quiche on spatula.
      Bacon and Sausage Quiche

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Cooked sausage patty being held by tongs.
    Print Pin
    5 from 8 votes

    How to Cook Sausage Patties in the Oven

    It's easy to cook sausage patties in the oven! No grease popping on the stovetop and they still get that golden brown color. Such a great option for making breakfast even easier.
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 patties
    Calories 0.4kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 packet sausage patties
    • biscuits for making a sandwich optional

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
    • Arrange the sausage patties on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper, ensuring they are not touching each other.
    • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees and bake for 15-20 minutes, flipping halfway through. For that perfect golden look, broil them for the last couple of minutes.

    Video

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1patty | Calories: 0.4kcal | Protein: 0.02g | Fat: 0.03g | Saturated Fat: 0.01g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 0.1mg | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 0.3mg | Vitamin A: 0.1IU | Vitamin C: 0.001mg | Calcium: 0.01mg | Iron: 0.001mg

    Salmon Sliders

    September 16, 2023

    Salmond slider with garlic aioli, tomato and lettuce.

    These salmon sliders start by baking the fish in the oven, and then topping them with a wonderful garlic aioli, crunchy bacon, and your favorite toppings, all served on a slider bun. It’s a sandwich recipe that will be great as a hearty appetizer or even a light lunch or dinner.

    Slider recipes are extremely popular around here. Our cheeseburger sliders were the first fan-favorite and these fish sliders offer a fried option of a seafood slider. But don’t miss these Italian sliders, fried chicken sliders, turkey sliders, sloppy joe sliders, and even breakfast sliders to get your slider fix.

    Salmon sliders on wooden cutting board.

    There’s just something about mini foods, am I right? A slider is just so much fun and the perfect bite for game day or when hosting a party.

    With these mini salmon burgers, you can have fun topping them with your favorite slider toppings, the garlic aioli sauce we give you below, or serve them your favorite way. If you’re in the mood for something a little more nostalgic, these old fashioned salmon patties are a great alternative. You can also make them mini and serve them with your favorite toppings and sauce.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    ❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Finger food friendly: Sliders are the perfect party food for people to grab while headed to the couch.
    • Make extras: The garlic aioli is perfect for salmon sliders sauce, but it makes a lot and can be enjoyed on anything!
    • Easily customizable: Feel free to use your favorite sauce, seasonings, herbs, lettuce, etc.

    🧾 Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for salmon sliders, that are sitting on marble counter.
    • Salmon – Look for beautiful filets that will hold their shape. You’ll be cutting them down to slider size. Make sure and check for any pin bones! If you have extra salmon, this salmon cooked with lemon pepper is a great option too.
    • Buns – Slider buns are cute little buns you can hold with one hand. Find them in the bread aisle, at the bakery, or even make your own!
    • Mayo – Select your favorite mayo that you love on its own, as we will be gently altering the taste with garlic.
    • Lemon – Fresh lemon is really necessary here! You’ll zest and juice one and slice another.
    • BLT – We are adding bacon, lettuce, and tomato to our salmon for amazing layers of texture!

    📖 Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Arugula – this fresh green is often described as lemony or peppery, and it might not be your cup of tea. Use any sort of baby green you prefer, such as baby kale or spinach.
    • Bacon – use thick, thin, smoked, regular – but make sure it is cooked crisp for a great added texture to your slider. If you don’t eat pork, feel free to use turkey bacon.

    📖 Variations

    • Salmon flavor – I used garlic lemon to pair with the homemade aioli, but you could also try Teriyaki or Cajun salmon, and add a sauce that pairs nicely. You may also like hot sauce if you’re the spicy type but we save that for buffalo chicken sliders.

    What’s the difference between a salmon slider and salmon burger? Salmon sliders are smaller and multiple can be considered a serving, or sliders are great small bites as an appetizer or even a side dish. Also, most salmon burgers are made from canned salmon that is mashed up with the mayo inside.

    👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make Salmon Sliders

    This salmon sliders recipe is broken into 3 components:

    • mix up aioli
    • cook the salmon and
    • assemble!

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Steps 1-4 of making salmon sliders.

    STEP 1. Make the aioli. Add all ingredients for aioli in a mixing bowl. Use a whisk or spatula to incorporate everything well (Images 1 & 2). Let chill in the fridge.

    STEP 2. Prepare salmon. Place cut filets on a lined baking sheet and add seasoning (Image 3). Add butter and lemon slices to each filet (Image 4) then bake.

    Tip: Cut your salmon into perfect-sized filets for your buns. Keep in mind they may shrink up just a bit when cooked.

    Steps 5- 8 of how to make salmon sliders.

    STEP 3. Assemble. Spread some of the aioli on both bun halves (your desired amount) and place one on a plate (Image 5).

    STEP 4. Veggies. Add arugula and tomato, then the cooked salmon (Images 6 & 7).

    STEP 5. Bacon. Top with bacon and then add the second bun, aioli side down (Image 8.)

    💭 Recipe Pro Tips

    • Make fresh. While the other ingredients are cold, I recommend baking and serving the salmon hot on the sliders.
    • Best buns. The larger Hawaiian slider buns are the for the perfect soft bun. (Not the small mini sliders unless you plan to cut the pieces of salmon in to really small pieces.) You can also find fresh sliders at the bakery.
    Salmon sliders on white platter.

    📋 Recipe FAQs

    Should I eat salmon slider warm or cold?

    Salmon sliders are best served when the salmon is still warm from the heat of the oven. The other ingredients are meant to be cold, though. 

    If your sliders cool off or if you decide to store leftovers in the fridge, I do not recommend attempting to reheat them. Just enjoy them cold!

    What is another variation I can make?

    I did a lemon-garlic salmon here but you could easily fill these sliders with another flavor profile. Use any salmon recipe you'd like! I bet Cajon or teriyaki salmon would be delicious. Just be sure to cut the fish down to slider-size. 

    Can I make this ahead of time and freeze it?

    Yes and no. While I do not suggest assembling the sandwiches or making the aioli ahead of time and freezing them (they just won't thaw well) you can do so with the salmon. Season and bake the salmon as you normally would, allow it to cool completely, seal it in an airtight container, and store it in the freezer for up to 3 months. 

    When you are ready to make some tasty salmon sliders, allow the fish to thaw in the fridge, whip up the aioli, and assemble as you normally would. 

    What is garlic aioli?

    Traditionally, garlic was added to oil and emulsified, no yolk! But nowadays, an aioli pretty much refers to mayo with yummy flavors added.

    🍽 What Goes With Salmon Sliders?

    A salmon sandwich goes well with sweet potato fries in the air fryer. You could also bake your own ranch potato wedges (perfect for dipping in the garlic aioli!). A classic green salad is also perfect on the side.

    Salmon sliders on wooden cutting board.

    ❄️ Storage

    Once these sliders are assembled, they are best enjoyed right away. If you find yourself with leftovers, however, allow them to cool completely before arranging them in a single layer in an airtight container. You can keep them in the fridge for up to 3 days. Just note that the buns and the veggies will start to get soggy. 

    These mini salmon sandwiches do not reheat well. So if you do end up storing them in the fridge for a bit, I suggest enjoying the leftovers cold. 

    🥪 More Slider Recipes You’ll Love

    • Stack of roast beef sliders.
      Roast Beef Sliders
    • Cheeseburger Sliders
      Cheeseburger Sliders with Hawaiian Rolls
    • Chicken salad with grapes and apples, sitting on bread.
      Harvest Chicken Salad
    • A metal spatula holds a cranberry and turkey slider above a pan of the same slider sandwiches
      Turkey Cranberry Sliders

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Salmond slider with garlic aioli, tomato and lettuce.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Salmon Sliders

    These salmon sliders are so easy to make and flavorful! Bake the fish in the oven and top it with the delicious garlic aioli, your favorite toppings, and assembled on slider buns.
    Course Dinner
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 sliders
    Calories 813kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    For the garlic aioli

    • 1 cup mayonnaise
    • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
    • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
    • 2 teaspoons garlic minced
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
    • ½ tablespoon chopped fresh parsley

    For the salmon

    • 2 pounds salmon cut square to fit your slider buns
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1 tablespoon Italian seasoning
    • 1 lemon thinly sliced
    • ½ cup butter cut into slices
    • 2 sprigs rosemary

    To assemble

    • 4 slider buns
    • 1 cup arugula
    • 4 thin slices of tomato
    • 8 slices crisp bacon

    Instructions

    • Prep. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F and line a baking tray with a sheet with parchment paper.
    • Make the aioli. mix together the mayo, lemon zest, lemon juice, garlic, salt, pepper, Dijon, and parsley until smooth. Cover and chill in the refrigerator while you make the salmon.
    • Bake the salmon. Arrange the salmon pieces on the prepared baking sheet. Season the salmon with salt, pepper, and Italian seasoning. Scatter the lemon slices, butter, and finely chop rosemary over the salmon. Bake for 20 minutes in the preheated oven.
    • Assemble the sliders. Remove the top halves of the slider buns, spread a bit of garlic aioli over them, and layer the ingredients into the buns in the following order: arugula, tomato, salmon, bacon. Slather the top halves of the buns with aioli and place them, aioli-side-down on top of the sliders to close them. Skewer the slider with a sandwich pick to hold them together.

    Notes

    • These mini salmon sandwiches do not reheat well. So if you do end up storing them in the fridge for a bit, I suggest enjoying the leftovers cold.
    • You will not use all of the aioli on these sandwiches so enjoy it for the rest of the week on these crab cake sandwiches or on these bratwursts in the oven.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slider | Calories: 813kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 54g | Fat: 55g | Saturated Fat: 17g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 15g | Monounsaturated Fat: 18g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 190mg | Sodium: 1316mg | Potassium: 1361mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 889IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 104mg | Iron: 4mg

    Pizza Monkey Bread

    September 12, 2023

    pizza monkey bread

    This pepperoni pizza monkey bread (or “monkey pizzas” as some call it) is a delicious blend of bread, pepperoni, parmesan cheese, marinara sauce, mozzarella cheese, and Italian seasoning, baked in a bundt pan creating a delicious appetizer recipe!

    With only a 10 minute prep time, and 40 minute bake time, this easy bread recipe is just about as easy as our pizza bagels and pairs perfectly with this side salad recipe!

    Pizza Monkey Bread Dipping in Marinara Sauce

    Like with classic monkey bread, this pull apart pepperoni bread is delicious all year long, especially around the holidays and during the summer when you want something quick and light for a main course! Similar to our French bread pizza recipe, it’s an easy one that you can make any time of year.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🧾 Ingredients

    We like to keep things really easy around here so this easy recipe uses store-bought frozen bread dough! You can also use biscuit pieces if that’s what you have on hand! Then, pick out your favorite pizza toppings if they differ from the list below!

    Ingredients on table for pizza bread
    • frozen bread dough (thawed 8-12 hours) 
    • olive oil
    • Italian seasoning
    • garlic
    • mozzarella cheese (shredded)
    • parmesan cheese
    • pepperoni slices
    • marinara sauce
    • fresh basil (optional garnish)

    See full, printable recipe card below for quantities and instructions!

    👩🏻‍🍳 Step by Step Instructions

    1. NOTE: Make sure you allow enough time to thaw frozen bread dough
      Thaw frozen bread dough out according to package directions – or you can put the 2 loaves of frozen bread dough on a plate loosely covered with plastic wrap on the counter overnight to allow the bread dough to thaw completely.  This works great if you are baking early in the day.  Or, if baking later in the day, plan to allow the dough to thaw for 8-12 hours.

    Before beginning, heat oven to 350 degrees and spray a bundt pan with cooking spray. (If you don’t have a bundt can, there are optional 9×13 baking pan instructions below.)

    Steps 1-4 of how to make pizza monkey bread.

    How to Bake

    1. In a large bowl, mix olive oil, garlic, and Italian seasoning together.
    2. Break the bread dough into golf ball size balls.
    3. Stir dough balls in the olive oil mixture. 
    Steps 5- 8 of how to make pizza monkey bread.
    1. Add cheeses, pepperoni, and 1 cup of marinara.
    2. Stir together well and then pour this mixture into the bundt pan. 
    1. Let it sit for about 15 minutes until doubled in size. 
    1. Bake at 350 degrees for 35-40 minutes and it should be golden brown.
    Baked pizza monkey bread
    1. Take it out of the oven and put it on a cooling rack. Let it sit for 10 minutes.
    2. Then turn the monkey bread out onto a serving dish and enjoy!  Serve with extra marinara sauce.

    🥫 Dipping Sauce Ideas:

    If you’d love to dip your “stuffed pizza bread” in to a delicious sauce, these are our favorites:

    • marinana or extra pizza sauce
    • jalapeno ranch dressing
    • bbq sauce
    • queso or melted cheese
    Pull apart pepperoni pizza monkey bread

    📖 Substitutions

    1. What if I don't have cloves of garlic?  In this recipe, you could substitute ¼ teaspoon garlic powder, ½ teaspoon minced garlic (or garlic flakes).  Do not substitute garlic salt as this will make the recipe too salty.  
    2. I don't have Italian seasoning- what else could I use?  In this recipe, you could substitute 2 teaspoons of oregano. 

    🍄 Pizza Topping Ideas

    Want to add your favorite toppings instead of pepperoni? That’s absolutely ok! Just make sure if you add different meats, that they’re already fully cooked before adding them to this bundt pan pizza to avoid any undercooking with the provided directions.

    Here are other pizza topping ideas to consider:

    • sausage
    • bacon
    • bell peppers
    • mushrooms
    • black olives
    • ham
    • hamburger
    • onions
    • jalapenos
    • red pepper flakes

    🧈 Optional Buttery Crust

    If you want to kick things up a notch, you can add a buttery crust topping for some extra flavor! Here’s how:

    Using a small bowl, mix together a little melted butter and garlic powder. Lightly brush the butter mixture on top of the cooked, pizza crust. Sprinkle with extra parmesan cheese.

    ❄️ Storage

    Refrigerate this pizza monkey bread in an airtight container or wrap securely in aluminum foil for up to 3 days. Or, you may freeze it for up to 3 months. 

    💡 Expert Tips:

    Does the pizza dough have to be perfectly round?

    No, but it’s important that the bread pieces are close in size so they bake evenly.

    How do you heat up monkey bread?

    It reheats really well in the microwave or, like with pizza, it reheats well in the air fryer so it gives that crispy texture of the original!

    Can I make monkey bread without a bundt pan?

    YES! If you don’t have a bundt pan to make this pull-apart bread, you can use a 9×13 baking dish instead and will have a baking time of 30 minutes instead.

    🍞 Related Recipes

    I know you love easy recipes as much as we do, so you’ll also love this focaccia bread, pizza hot dog, and this homemade soft pretzel recipe! Or, if you need a bread side dish recipe, you can’t go wrong with this cheesy pull-apart bread.

    Recipe

    pizza monkey bread
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Pizza Monkey Bread

    This pepperoni pizza monkey bread is a delicious blend of bread, parmesan cheese, marinara sauce, pepperoni, mozzarella cheese and italian seasoning, baked in a bundt pan creating a delicious appetizer recipe!
    Course Appetizer, Main Course
    Cuisine Italian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 40 minutes minutes
    Total Time 50 minutes minutes
    Servings 10 servings
    Calories 224kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • oven

    Ingredients

    • 2 loaves frozen bread dough thawed (allow 8-12 hours)
    • 3 tablespoon olive oil
    • 2 teaspoon Italian seasoning
    • 2 cloves garlic
    • 3 cups mozzarella cheese shredded
    • ¼ cup parmesan cheese grated or shredded
    • 1 cup pepperoni chopped or sliced thin
    • 3 cups marinara sauce 1 cup in bread, 2 cups for dipping
    • fresh basil if desired, chopped

    Instructions

    Thaw Frozen Bread Dough

    • Thaw frozen bread dough for 8-12 hours prior to cooking.

    How to Bake

    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees
    • Spray a bundt pan with non-stick spray. 
    • In a large mixing bowl, mix olive oil, garlic, and italian seasoning together.
    • Break the bread dough into golf ball size balls.
    • Stir bread balls in the olive oil mixture. 
    • Add cheeses, pepperoni, and 1 cup of marinara and stir together well and then pour this mixture into the bundt pan. 
    • Let it sit for about 15 minutes until doubled in size. 
    • Bake at 350 degrees for 35-40 minutes.
    • Take it out of the oven and put it on a cooling rack.
    • Let it sit for 10 minutes and then turn the monkey bread out onto a serving dish and enjoy!
    • Serve with extra marinara sauce or desired dipping sauce!

    Notes

    Does the bread dough have to be perfect balls? 
    No but you do need to make sure they’re about the same size so they bake evenly.
    Can I make money bread without a bundt pan?
    YES! If you don’t have a bundt pan to make this pull-apart bread, you can use a 9×13 baking dish instead and will have a baking time of 30 minutes instead.
    How to Store Leftover:
    Store any leftovers in an airtight container or securely wrapped with aluminum foil for 3-4 days in the refrigerator.
    How do you reheat monkey bread?
    It reheats really well in the microwave or, like with pizza, it reheats well in the air fryer so it gives that crispy outside texture and soft center like the original!
    Additional Topping Ideas:
    • sausage
    • bacon
    • bell peppers
    • mushrooms
    • black olives
    • ham
    • hamburger
    • onions
    • jalapenos
    • red pepper flakes

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 224kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 40mg | Sodium: 836mg | Potassium: 310mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 572IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 219mg | Iron: 1mg

    Creamy Taco Soup

    September 12, 2023

    Creamy taco soup serving in white bowl.

    Creamy Taco Soup: Get ready to add this comforting fall and winter soup to your weekly dinner menu! It’s easy to make, ready in under an hour, kid-friendly, and uses just a few ingredients! It’s definitely one of our favorite go-to soup recipes to make at home.

    Creamy taco soup in white bowl.

    Taco recipes, like this taco chicken casserole and these crispy chicken tacos, are another way to enjoy tacos for dinner, by using chicken if you have that on hand as well!

    Soup recipes like this classic chili, white chicken chili, and lasagna soup, are amazing during the cooler months. However, taco recipes are delicious all year long, so having tacos in soup form, during the fall and winter is a wonderful bonus.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • It uses a few ingredients: Yes! Only a few ingredients are needed for this creamy taco soup, and you probably even have most, if not all of these ingredients on hand.
    • Make-ahead recipe: Sometimes making soups in advance is a great way to meal prep but soups can sometimes marry together even better when made early, and they sit together to blend.
    • Ready in under an hour: Talk about a quick and easy dinner idea! This recipe, from start to finish, is the perfect option for a busy night for dinner. This tortellini soup is ready in just under an hour too, so it’s also a great option.

    Ingredients Needed

    As you can see below, the ingredients are pretty basic and they’re great to keep on hand for a last-minute dinner idea.

    Ingredients for creamy taco soup on marble counter.

    Substitutions

    If you find that substitutions are needed, such as you’re missing an ingredient or you prefer to leave something out, that’s perfectly fine! Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Ground beef – Ground chicken, ground pork, ground venison or even tofu can be used in this taco soup recipe. Or, you can also leave the meat out if you prefer, and save it for this fun walking taco casserole!
    • Broth – Vegetable broth, chicken broth (or my easy chicken broth recipe), or a low-sodium broth can be used instead.
    • Taco seasoning – We love making our own chicken taco seasoning and that can also be used in this recipe, instead of the packet.
    • Rotel – There are versions of “hot” diced green chilies and tomatoes that you can use also, to add more heat.

    How to Make Creamy Taco Soup

    Would you believe there are only two parts to making this soup? Cooking the ground beef, and then combining that with the rest of the ingredients, allowing it to simmer and cook together. It doesn’t get much easier than that!

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Steps 1-4 how to make creamy taco soup.

    STEP 1. Cook the ground beef. In a stockpot, brown ground beef until fully cooked. Drain excess grease (Image 1).

    STEPS 2 & 3. Add the remaining ingredients to cooked ground beef (Images 2&3).

    STEP 4. Cook and simmer. Cook on medium heat for 25-30 minutes or until cream cheese has melted and blended in, stirring occasionally. Note: Sometimes using a whisk at the end of the cooking time, speeds this up. (Image 4.)

    Creamy taco soup in white bowl, next to lime and potato chips.

    Serve warm, and as is, or top with your favorite toppings! See ideas below:

    Taco Soup Topping Ideas – If you prefer to add some toppings to your soup, here are some great ideas:

    • sour cream
    • shredded cheese
    • tortilla chips
    • wonton strips
    • corn chips
    • green onions
    • taco sauce
    • hot sauce
    • guacamole
    • homemade croutons
    Spoon lifting out a bite of creamy taco soup, out of small white bowl.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Allow soup to simmer. If you have time, allowing a soup to simmer for an hour can make the flavors blend together even more!
    • Slow Cooker Creamy Taco Soup. Love Crock Pot recipes? Brown your ground beef and then place all of the ingredients in a slow cooker and allow the soup to cook together, and the cream cheese to melt, on low for at least 3 hours.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you make soup more creamy?

    Cream cheese is added to soup to make it more creamy. Heavy cream, sour cream, and other thickening items can make soup more creamy.

    Why is my taco soup so watery?

    If the corn wasn’t drained, this could make your taco soup more watery or perhaps water was added when it wasn’t supposed to be.

    What is the best way to eat taco soup?

    The best way to eat taco soup is warm. Serving with your favorite taco toppings and side dishes is also a great way to eat taco soup.

    What to Serve with this Soup

    Taco side dishes can go great with this taco soup, such as hot taco dip, guacamole or even a crusty Italian bread for dipping. Or, go all out for taco night and make this fried taco recipe to serve with the soup.

    However, easy sandwiches such as this peanut butter and syrup sandwich offer a sweet combo with the salty soup.

    Storage

    Leftovers: If you have leftover creamy taco soup, once it has cooled, you can store it in an airtight container and place in the refrigerator for 4-5 days.

    Freeze: If you prefer to freeze the leftovers, or saving for meal planning freezer meals, this soup freezes really well. Once it has cooled, place it in a freezer-safe container and freeze for up to 3 months.

    Thaw: To thaw this soup, place in the refrigerator to thaw, or place frozen soup in a stock post and reheat/melt over low heat, slowly.

    More Recipes You’ll Love

    If you love easy soup recipes, that feature similar ingredients, then you’re also going to love this easy ham and beans recipe too! Or if you find that you like using ground beef for a lot of your dinners, then you’ll love this list of ground beef dinner ideas.

    • Homemade chili in small bowl with Fritos and cheese on top.
      Simple Chili Recipe
    • Southern chicken and dumplings in bowl.
      Chicken and Dumplings
    • Homemade Chicken Broth
    • Loaded Potato Soup in small crock, next to fabric napkin.
      Loaded Baked Potato Soup Recipe

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Creamy taco soup serving in white bowl.
    Print Pin
    4.45 from 9 votes

    Creamy Taco Soup

    Creamy taco soup is easy to make and has tons of taco flavor, with hearty ground beef, beans, tomatoes, in a creamy base.
    Course Soup
    Cuisine Mexican
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 315kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 pound ground beef
    • 1 ounce pack of taco seasoning
    • 8 ounces cream cheese cut in to small blocks
    • 4 cups beef broth
    • 10 ounce can Rotel
    • 15.25 ounce can corn drained
    • 15.5 ounce can chili beans

    Optional Toppings:

    • tortilla chips
    • sour cream
    • shredded cheese
    • jalapenos
    • avocado

    Instructions

    • In a stockpot, brown ground beef until fully cooked.
    • Add remaining ingredients in to cooked ground beef.
    • Cook on medium heat for 25-30 minutes, or until cream cheese has melted, and blended in, stirring occasionally. (Sometimes using a whisk at the end of the cook time, speeds this up.)
    • Serve alone or with optional toppings.

    Video

    Notes

    Leftovers: If you have leftover creamy taco soup, once it has cooled, you can store it in an airtight container and place in the refrigerator for 4-5 days.
    Freeze: If you prefer to freeze the leftovers, or saving for meal planning freezer meals, this soup freezes really well. Once it has cooled, place it in a freezer-safe container and freeze for up to 3 months.
    Thaw: To thaw this soup, place in the refrigerator to thaw, or place frozen soup in a stock post and reheat/melt over low heat, slowly.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving (⅙ recipe) | Calories: 315kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 90mg | Sodium: 1146mg | Potassium: 361mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 952IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 58mg | Iron: 2mg

    Hamburger Mac and Cheese

    September 10, 2023

    Hamburger Mac and Cheese on wooden spoon, lifting out of skillet.

    Hamburger Mac and Cheese Recipe: Forget the Hamburger Helper and get this dinner recipe on the table in less than thirty minutes with this super simple hamburger mac and cheese recipe. This homemade version is better than the boxed version,

    Easy, cheesy, quick and easy? What more could you want for a weeknight one-skillet dinner recipe? It’s similar to our Instant Pot Cheeseburger Macaroni that has gone viral for years!

    Wooden spoon holding hamburger mac and cheese.

    Obsessed with one pan or one pot meals like I am? I love how easy the delicious recipes make chaotic evenings. Two of my favorite delicious comfort foods include this Cheesy Rice recipe and this One Pan Pork Chops and Veggies recipe. They’re delicious during the fall months, as well as all of our casserole recipes, and of course these old-fashioned sloppy joes on a cool night.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • It’s ready fast: This easy homemade hamburger helper recipe comes together in 20 minutes or less.
    • Uses minimal dishes: This one-skillet dinner requires only a chopping board, knife, skillet, bowl, measuring cup, and cooking utensil of your choice.
    • It’s family-friendly: It is perfect for busy weeknights and a dinner your children will actually eat that the entire family will love.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic and you might already have them at home!

    Labeled ingredients for hamburger mac and cheese.
    • Ground Beef – Keep in mind that the leaner the meat, the less grease you’ll end up with. Lean ground beef will yield less grease than 80/20 ground beef. Either way, we always suggest draining the excess liquid after cooking the meat.
    • Elbow Macaroni – While any noodle option will suffice, elbow macaroni are a classic and what is used in traditional Hamburger Helper and that is why we went with them! We love using this type of noodle in our old-fashioned recipes – like in this macaroni and tomatoes recipe!
    • Cream Cheese – Cream cheese makes this recipe super creamy and delicious.
    • Diced Tomatoes – We opt for pre-diced, canned tomatoes for this. It’s all about making dinner easier so why not?
    • Shredded Cheddar Cheese – Again, opt for the pre-shredded cheese at the grocery store. Save yourself the additional time and clean up.
    • Sweet Onion – This is where so much of the flavor in this recipe comes from. While you could go with a yellow or white onion, the sweet diced onions provides the superior flavor.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Meat – If you’re not a fan of ground beef, or you want to go with a healthier option, go for some ground turkey. You’ll find less fat in that option and save some calories.
    • Dairy – If you’re trying to stay away from dairy products, you can easily make this recipe dairy-free by opting for dairy-free cream cheese and cheese, as well as opting for non-dairy milks over the heavy cream mentioned in the recipe.
    • Noodles – Rotini, ziti, bowtie, or shell noodles can be used instead.
    • Tomatoes – Substitute the tomatoes with 3 tablespoons of tomato sauce if you like the tomato flavor but not the texture of tomatoes in your mac and cheese.
    • Cheese – Cheddar cheese with Monterey jack or Colby jack cheese can be used instead.
    • Onions – You can substitute sweet onion with white or yellow onion.
    • Heavy Cream – Whole milk or half and half can be used instead of heavy cream if preferred.
    • Broth – Feel free to use water, vegetable broth, turkey broth, or chicken broth. You can even make my homemade chicken broth recipe.

    Variations

    There are so many variations you could add to this recipe. It is pretty versatile!

    • Adding Veggies – This recipe doesn’t include vegetables, but you could easily add in some prechopped bell preppers (saute them first and then add them back in at the end) or even some spinach! Some diced green chiles could add some great flavor as well.
    • Change Up the Cooking Method – You can also make this hamburger mac and cheese in a large pot instead of a skillet. No difference in instructions or ingredients. You can also bake the cooked hamburger mac and cheese in your oven in a 9×9 baking dish with breadcrumbs or crumbles on top at 375 for 10 minutes or just long enough to brown the bread crumble toppings.
    • Adding Seasonings – You could add some onion powder and garlic powder when cooking the meat to add some extra flavor.
    • Top it Off – Sauces can really upgrade this recipe! Some hot sauce goes a long way. Top your serving with your favorite hot sauce for a kick!

    How to Make Hamburger Mac and Cheese

    Putting this homemade cheeseburger macaroni recipe together is super simple and oh-so fast!

    This Hamburger Mac and Cheese is broken into 4 components:

    • cooking the macaroni noodles
    • cooking the beef
    • adding in the cheeses
    • tying everything together

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    You’ll start this recipe by cooking the noodles in a large skillet before sticking them aside and cooking the ground beef in the same skillet. We’re going for minimal dish cleanup here!

    Steps 1-4 of how to make hamburger mac and cheese.

    STEP 1. Cook the noodles. In an extra-large skillet, cook uncooked pasta in beef broth for about 10 minutes or until tender, if you prefer al dente noodles you can reduce that time to 6 minutes. Once cooked place them in a large bowl and set them aside in the broth to prevent sticking. (Image 1).

    STEP 2. Cooking the ground beef with the onions. Place ground beef and onion into the skillet. Break up the ground beef and cook over medium heat until browned and cooked throughout. The onions should be tender but not burnt. Drain any excess liquid from the skillet. (Image 2).

    Tip: Cooking the ground beef with the onions adds some additional flavor to the meat and saves time. If you’d prefer, you would caramelize the onions in the pan first and then add the ground beef.

    STEP 3. Adding in the cheeses. Reduce heat to low and stir in cheddar cheese, cream cheese, salt, butter, and heavy cream. Stir continuously until the cheese has melted and all ingredients are smooth and creamy. (Image 3).

    STEP 4. Combining all. Add drained noodles and diced tomato to the beef and cheese mixture and stir well until combined. (Image 4).

    Mixed hamburger with cheese in skillet.

    STEP 5. Serve. Serve warm in the skillet.

    Cooked hamburger mac and cheese on wooden spatula.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Serve warm and fresh. Serving this dish warm provides the best flavor and texture.
    • Drain the liquid. After cooking the ground beef and onions, make sure to fully drain the liquid before moving on to the next step.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I eat this warm or cold?

    This hamburger mac and cheese should be enjoyed warm.

    What is another variation I can make?

    You can also make this hamburger mac and cheese in a large pot instead of a skillet. No difference in instructions or ingredients. You can also bake the cooked hamburger mac and cheese in your oven in a 9×9 baking dish with breadcrumbs or crumbles on top at 375 for 10 minutes or just long enough to brown the bread crumble toppings.

    What is the best ground beef to use with this recipe?

    The best ground beef to use with this hamburger mac and cheese is 80/20 or leaner. You don't want very fatty beef because the beef will not crumble and distribute evenly throughout the mac and cheese. It will also be greasy.

    Do I need to add salt when cooking the noodles?

    No, you do not need to add salt when cooking the noodles in the broth. The sodium in the broth is enough for flavor and to prevent the noodles from sticking.

    The noodle box instructions say to cook the noodles in less time.

    When cooking noodles in broth, it may take additional time for them to soften as opposed to cooking them in water.

    My cheese isn't melting.

    Your cheese may not melt well if it was pre-shredded cheese. I recommend shredding the cheese yourself for the quickest cheese melt. Pre-shredded cheese can be coated with agents that prevent it from sticking together when shipping, which also prevents it from melting together when needed.

    What to Serve with Hamburger Mac and Cheese

    This recipe is great on its own, but it’s even better with sides. I suggest pairing it with either our Homemade Focaccia Bread recipe for yummy dipping or our Air Fryer Zucchini to get the veggies in.

    Spoon of hamburger mac and cheese lifting out of bowl.

    Storage

    Leftovers: This hamburger mac and cheese can be stored in an airtight container in your refrigerator for up to 4 days.

    Freeze: Yes, you can make this hamburger mac and cheese ahead of time and freeze it in a freezer-safe container in your freezer for up to 3 months. To thaw, leave the hamburger mac and cheese in the container and place it in your refrigerator for 24-48 hours or until thawed throughout. 

    Reheat: To reheat, you can place the thawed hamburger mac and cheese in a pot on your stove and heat it on medium-low until it reaches the desired temperature. You need to stir it continually so that it doesn't stick to the pot. You can add small amounts of milk and butter to bring it back to the texture and creaminess you want.

    Similar Recipes

    Looking for more easy dinner recipe options for weeknights similar to this one? I think you’d love these quick and easy dinner recipes!

    • Close up photo of a bowl brimming with noodles, vegetables and ground beef in a rich red tomato based sauce
      Crock Pot Goulash
    • Cheeseburger Casserole
      Cheeseburger Casserole
    • Instant Pot Chili Mac
    • beef stroganoff in black skillet
      Easy Beef Stroganoff Recipe

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Hamburger Mac and Cheese on wooden spoon, lifting out of skillet.
    Print Pin
    4.75 from 12 votes

    Hamburger Mac and Cheese

    Easy, one-skillet Hamburger Mac and Cheese with ground beef is ready in twenty minutes or less. Perfect for busy weeknights!
    Course Dinner
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 Servings
    Calories 858kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • Large Skillet

    Ingredients

    • 1 pound ground beef
    • 16 ounces large elbow noodles
    • 8 ounces cream cheese
    • ¼ cup diced tomatoes
    • 4 cups shredded cheddar cheese
    • ½ sweet onion (chopped)
    • ½ cup butter (one stick)
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • ¾ cup heavy cream
    • 5 cups beef broth

    Instructions

    • In an extra-large skillet, cook noodles in beef broth for about 10 minutes or until tender, if you prefer al-dente noodles you can reduce that time to 6 minutes. Once cooked place them in a large bowl and set them aside in the broth to prevent sticking.
      16 ounces large elbow noodles, 5 cups beef broth
    • Place ground beef and onion into the skillet. Break up the ground beef and cook over medium heat until browned and cooked throughout. The onions should be tender but not burnt. Drain any excess liquid from the skillet.
      1 pound ground beef, ½ sweet onion
    • Reduce heat to low and stir in cheddar cheese, cream cheese, salt, butter, and heavy cream. Stir continuously until the cheese has melted and all ingredients are smooth and creamy.
      8 ounces cream cheese, 4 cups shredded cheddar cheese, ½ cup butter, 1 teaspoon salt, ¾ cup heavy cream
    • Add drained noodles and diced tomatoes to the beef and cheese mixture and stir well until combined.
      ¼ cup diced tomatoes
    • Serve warm from the skillet.

    Notes

    Can I freeze this to enjoy later?
    This can be made ahead of time and frozen for later. Freeze the fully cooked recipe in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months and thaw in the refrigerator before reheating.
    Want to bake this instead? Assemble cooked ground beef and noodles and place in a 9×9 baking dish with breadcrumbs or crumbles on top at 375 for 10 minutes or just long enough to brown the bread crumble toppings.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cup | Calories: 858kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 36g | Fat: 58g | Saturated Fat: 33g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 179mg | Sodium: 1448mg | Potassium: 519mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1638IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 481mg | Iron: 2mg

    Mountain Picnic Set Up

    September 8, 2023

    This picnic set up on the mountain turned out exactly like I had hoped. The beautiful thing about the whole thing? It only took about 30 minutes to get this all set up and ready for guests.

    Planning gatherings & celebrations doesn’t have to be difficult to create something beautiful. I’m sharing with you the tips that I have and shortcuts that I used to style this picnic on the mountain that feels like a luxury picnic experience.

    Picnic set up in a pasture and on a mountain.

    Picnics are an amazing idea for big and little events such as, baby showers, bridal showers, birthday parties, date nights, special anniversaries, and even just a small picnic party like we had with friends. (See more video details from our picnic night.)

    The Perfect Location

    No matter where you live there can be a perfect location for your picnic. Whether that’s:

    • in the back yard
    • living room floor (see these indoor picnic food ideas)
    • at the beach (see these beach picnic food ideas)
    • public parks
    • on the farm
    • on a mountain
    Close up photo of picnic table, with flowers and candles.

    Picnic Colors

    When planning this picnic, I knew I wanted to keep the colors soft yet make sure that I had a pop of color so the picnic didn’t blend in completely with the surroundings.

    So knowing that the bright red fruits on the charcuterie boards would add that amount of color, I knew the colors of the flowers, pillows, blankets and napkins, could also be soft, yet still colorful.

    Decorating Tip:

    When deciding on colors for your picnic, it’s important to consider the surroundings of where your picnic will be. Will it be fall, so the colors will be orange, green and reds all around? Springtime, where bright green, whites, and light pinks will be outside? Or perhaps it will be inside and the walls are a certain color, or the furniture is a bright color that will be important to work with.

    My biggest tip for working with any color, is to keep the decorations for your picnic, neutral and with greenery as your pop of color. The greenery will provide a pop of color while the neutral colors can blend in with almost any surroundings.

    Picnic table set up in field on the mountain.

    Picnic Tables

    The picnic table that I used for this picnic is one that I found online and fell in love with because it folds up for easy storage and you can unscrew the legs and store them inside. Plus, the design of the boards are beautiful, as well as the colors of the wood and it even comes with a carrying handle!

    So if your picnic is away from home, this table is easy to take along with you. It also comes with two different sizes of legs, so you can have table with short legs (what you see in the photos), or even shorter legs.

    However if you don’t want to use a picnic table like I used here, using pallets is a great way to also set up a space, or using saw horses and a wooden table top (or door, or plywood) like you see in our backyard pop-up dinner party.

    Place setting for picnic on the mountain.

    Serveware

    Since snacking and having cocktails were on the menu, using small plates and mini tongs (similar) were perfect for enjoying the small bites of food.

    We also used beautiful french wine glasses (not pictured here – but seen on the Instagram video) for the champange that we thoroughly enjoyed that night.

    For the place settings, I thought it would be fun to use kraft gift tags, tie those around the tongs, and write adorable adjectives on each tag, so each guest could choose an adjective for them. (i.e. captivating, exquisite, etc.)

    Champagne chilling in drink basket beverage tub.

    Drinks

    Because I look for an excuse to buy and have pink champagne, it was a must for this mountain picnic.

    Chilling it in a woven beverage tub really helped bring in the wood-color from the picnic table. (It has since sold out but here are some other adorable beverage tubs: Jute Robe Beverage Tub and this Rose Copper Tub.

    Charcuterie board on picnic table.

    What Food to Pack for a Picnic

    There’s something about a beautiful charcuterie board on a picnic table and to have three boards full of our favorite snacks, was something we were looking so forward to. Fun tip: See how to make salami roses for a charcuterie board too.

    I share a lot of my charcuterie boards on a just-for-fun Charcuterie Board Instagram page, if you’re looking for some ideas!

    If charcuterie boards aren’t what you desire for your picnic, other great ideas include:

    • food from your favorite restaurants
    • a home-cooked meal
    • food bar (such as burger-bar, dessert bar, etc.)

    A picnic is really all about the food, so choosing things that are easy to transport and hold up well outside makes a big difference. You'll want a mix of simple snacks, something a little more filling, and a sweet treat to finish it off.

    If you're not sure where to start, these picnic-friendly ideas are easy to pack and always a hit.


    Easy Snacks for a Picnic

    Things like chips, crackers, fresh fruit, and simple dips are perfect for grazing and don't require much prep.

    Here’s a list of my favorite snack ideas for a picnic.


    Simple Meal Ideas

    Sandwiches, sliders (like these turkey sliders), pasta salads, or wraps like these chicken Asian lettuce wraps are great options when you want something a little more filling without making things complicated.

    I also share great food ideas for a picnic in this list of indoor picnic food ideas.


    Desserts That Travel Well

    Cookies, no-bake recipes, and simple cake recipes are ideal for picnics since they don't need refrigeration and are easy to serve.


    Planning a Picnic for Two?

    If you're keeping things simple, you might also like these picnic ideas for couples that focus on easy food and a relaxed setup.

    Charcuterie board with meats, vegetables, fruits, and crackers.

    Instead of doing one big board, I thought it would be easier to do 3 smaller boards so guests could easily reach the different items. This charcuterie board is similar to 2 of the board sizes/shapes that I used for this spread since they were narrow and longer, so they could be enjoyed more easily by each side of the table.

    Dessert charcuterie board with cookies, fruit, chocolates and more.

    For the dessert “board” (which I actually used a round marble cake stand) I feel like it gives the table a little height and was a focal point that guests could feel drawn to. (I mean, who doesn’t love sweets?)

    Picnic set up ideas.

    Decor

    For the decor, such as pillows, flowers and accents, I decided to keep it simple, yet classy. If you’ve ever heard “less is more”, I’m a firm believer in that saying and believe it applies to decorating too. Sometimes the surroundings can also be part of the experience.

    If you see something I’ve used in this picnic set up that you’d love to get for yourself too, I’ve linked to the items below:

    • Fabric napkin
    • Greenery
    • Small floral blossom
    • Bunny tail flowers in pink
    • Candle holders
    • Candles
    • Square tufted pillows
    • Round pillows
    • Large square throw pillow
    • Blankets on ground
    • Lanterns (similar)
    • Blanket as table runner (no longer available)

    Final Picnic Setup Tips

    If you’re hosting a picnic, here are some other tips that will help make your picnic a success:

    • Additional Guests. This setup was made for 6. However if you’re having a larger picnic, make sure to allow enough seating room for the guests. Sitting on the ground will cause the guests to want to stretch out so they’re comfortable so make sure to make room for legs, leaning back, etc.
    • Day of your picnic. Work ahead of time. Doing as much as you can before the day of the picnic, can help lessen the workload on the day of, which can then mean that you can hopefully enjoy the picnic yourself even more!
    • Fresh flowers. Using fresh can be so beautiful and definitely an option. However, I chose to use fake florals so I can reuse them, which is anothe reason why I like to keep colors neutral so they can work for multiple color themes.
    • Bluetooth speaker. Don’t forget the music! Adding music can create a little ambiance. So charge up that bluetooth speaker so it’s ready to go for the special occasion.

    Here’s to hoping you have the very best time at your own picnic!

    Burger Bombs

    September 7, 2023

    Burget bomb with a bite taken out of it.

    This recipe for Burger Bombs with a delicious dipping sauce is a dream come true for burger lovers seeking a fun twist on their favorite meal. The process is easy and the ingredients are simple, making it an ideal dish for both weekday dinners and weekend get-togethers.

    You love our baked cheeseburgers and our cheeseburger sliders, so we knew that adding burger bombs to our favorite burgers was a must!

    Burger bombs stacked on top of one another.

    Inspired to make more fresh burgers? Why not try these Burger Bar Ideas for Your Next Party and make the burgers the food star of the show? Or you could try these Aloha Burgers that are a great change from the classic cheeseburger we all love.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    ❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Easy to customize: The recipe is really easy to customize to what you like or what you have around the house.
    • Feed the whole family: If you are feeding the whole family and a few extras, this is a great recipe that makes 20 rolls.
    • Ready in only 40 minutes: With 20 minutes to prepare and the same for cooking time, this recipe doesn’t take long to make

    🧾 Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for burger bombs.
    • Beef – You’ll want juicy ground beef for this recipe as it is easy to work into the right shape for the burger bites.
    • Seasoning – We use steak seasoning to add to the meat to give it a great flavor or you can use seasoning salt.
    • Rolls – Frozen dinner rolls work perfectly for this recipe, just let them thaw first before you start adding ingredients.

    📖 Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Ground Beef: You can substitute ground beef with ground turkey or chicken for a leaner option. For a vegetarian alternative, try lentils or a plant-based meat substitute.
    • Minced Garlic: If fresh minced garlic is not available, you can use ⅛ teaspoon of garlic powder in place of each clove, or jarred minced garlic at a 1:1 ratio.
    • Steak Seasoning: In the absence of steak seasoning, you can create your own blend with a mix of salt, black pepper, paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, and a pinch of cayenne.
    • Cheddar Cheese: Feel free to replace cheddar cheese with any melt-able cheese of your preference. Gouda, Monterey Jack, or mozzarella can work well. For a dairy-free option, try a vegan cheese substitute.

    📖 Variations

    • Vegetarian Burger Bombs: Substitute the ground beef with a mix of sautéed mushrooms, bell peppers, and onions. Pair with a vegan cheese to create a delicious vegetarian version of these burger bombs.
    • Gluten-Free Burger Bombs: Use gluten-free dinner rolls and ensure all other ingredients including the steak seasoning and Worcestershire sauce are gluten-free.
    • Spicy Burger Bombs: Add a finely chopped jalapeno pepper to the beef mixture for an extra kick, and also consider adding a dash of hot sauce to the dipping sauce.
    • BBQ Burger Bombs: Substitute the ketchup and Dijon mustard in the beef mixture with your favorite BBQ sauce for a smoky flavor twist.
    • Cheese-Stuffed Burger Bombs: Instead of mixing the cheese in with the beef, place a small cube of cheese in the center of each burger bomb for a melty, cheesy surprise when bitten into.
    • Bacon Cheeseburger Bombs: Add your favorite cheese and bacon for this classic family favorite.

    👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make Burger Bombs

    These burger bombs recipe is broken into 3 components:

    • Prepare the rolls
    • Make the burger bites and cook
    • Make the sauce and serve

    Ensure that the dough has been thawed and allowed to rise halfway. Flatten and stretch it into a wide circle for filling.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    STEP 1: Prepare the rolls. Place the rolls on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and lightly cover them with a towel. Let them thaw and rise until they have expanded by about half.

    STEP 2: Cook beef. Sauté the beef, onions, and garlic in a large skillet over medium heat until the meat is no longer pink. Drain fat. Season with steak seasoning and Worcestershire sauce for added flavor. (Images 1-2)

    Steps 1-4 of how to make burger bombs.

    STEP 3: Mix the other ingredients. Combine cheese cube, cream cheese, crisp bacon, chopped pickles, ketchup, and Dijon mustard together. (Images 3-4)

    STEP 4: Fill the rolls. Take one roll at a time and gently flatten it into a round circle. Next, generously spoon a tablespoon of the savory meat filling onto the center. Carefully fold and seal the sides of the roll, ensuring a secure closure. Shape the roll into a perfect round ball. (Images 5-6)

    Steps 5-8 of how to make burger bombs.

    STEP 5: Egg wash the rolls. Arrange the rolls on the baking pan and continue until all rolls are filled. Gently brush the rolls with the beaten egg and a sprinkle of water, then generously sprinkle sesame seeds on top. (Image 7)

    STEP 6: Leave the dough to rise. Let the dough rise for a duration of 15 minutes. (Image 8)

    STEP 7: Cook the rolls. Preheat the oven to 375 degrees. Allow the rolls to bake for approximately 20 minutes until they turn a golden brown color.

    Baked burger bombs on cookie sheet.

    STEP 8: Make the sauce. While the rolls are in the oven, mix the sauce ingredients together in a medium bowl and stir thoroughly to combine.

    STEP 9: Cool the rolls and serve. Allow the rolls to cool for 5 minutes, then serve alongside the dipping sauce.

    💭 Recipe Pro Tips

    • Keep an eye on the rolls in the oven to prevent over-browning. If they start to get too dark, you can cover them with a sheet of aluminum foil for the rest of the baking time.
    • Make sure to seal the rolls properly so the filling doesn’t leak out during baking. Spend a little extra time ensuring each roll is completely closed.
    • Feel free to experiment with different kinds of cheese, seasonings, and sauces for the filling to create your own unique version of these tasty burger bombs.
    • These burger bombs can be made ahead of time and kept in the refrigerator until you’re ready to bake them. 
    • If you prefer a crunchier exterior, sprinkle the tops of the rolls with sesame seeds or poppy seeds before baking.
    • It’s important to let the rolls cool down slightly before serving, as the filling will be very hot. To maintain their warmth while cooling, cover them with a clean kitchen cloth.
    Baked burger bombs with sesame seeds.

    📋 Recipe FAQs

    Can I use ground turkey instead of beef for the Burger Bombs?

    Absolutely! Ground turkey can be a leaner alternative to beef. Keep in mind, however, that turkey might provide a slightly different flavor and texture.

    Can I prepare the filling for the Burger Bombs the night before?

    Yes, preparing the filling in advance can save you time. Simply store the filling in the refrigerator overnight in an airtight container. When you’re ready to make your Burger Bombs, take the filling out of the fridge and let it come to room temperature before using.

    How can I make this recipe vegetarian?

    To make this recipe vegetarian, substitute the beef with a plant-based meat alternative. You can also use a mixture of cooked, finely chopped vegetables like mushrooms, bell peppers, and onions.

    How do I store leftover dipping sauce?

    Leftover dipping sauce can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to a week. Be sure to stir the sauce before using it again.

    🍽 What to Serve with Burger Bombs

    Burger Bombs make for a delightful and filling dish on their own, but they also pair wonderfully with various side dishes to complete your meal. 

    • Crisp Salad: A refreshing green salad with a tangy vinaigrette can balance the richness of the burger bombs. 
    • Potato Wedges or Fries: Classic pairings like crispy oven-baked fries or seasoned potato wedges complement the burger bombs perfectly.
    • Coleslaw: The creaminess and crunch of a good coleslaw can offer an interesting textural contrast.
    • Grilled Vegetables: Grilled vegetables brushed with a light seasoning can be a hearty and healthy companion to this dish.
    • Pickles: Extra pickles can add a tangy crunch that cuts through the richness of the meat and cheese.
    Burger bomb with a bite taken out.

    ❄️ Storage

    Burger Bombs are perfect for storing and enjoying later! If you have leftovers, ensure they are cooled completely, then store them in an airtight container. They can be kept in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.

    To reheat, simply place them in a preheated oven at 350°F until warmed through. 

    As for freezing, Burger Bombs freeze beautifully. Once cooled, place them on a baking sheet and freeze until solid. Once frozen, transfer them to a freezer-safe bag or container. They can be stored in the freezer for up to 3 months. When ready to enjoy, thaw them overnight in the refrigerator and reheat in your oven at 350°F. Remember, they may require a few extra minutes of heating time from frozen.

    🥩 More Ground Beef Recipes You’ll Love

    Still have some ground beef left to use? You’ll love this incredible list of ground beef dinner ideas.

    • beef stroganoff in black skillet
      Easy Beef Stroganoff Recipe
    • french onion beef casserole scooped up out of white dish
      French Onion Beef Casserole
    • Hamburger hashbrown casserole in baking dish with ladle resting in it.
      Hamburger Hashbrown Casserole
    • Cheeseburger Casserole
      Cheeseburger Casserole

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Burget bomb with a bite taken out of it.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Burger Bombs with Dipping Sauce

    How about a fun way to enjoy cheeseburgers instead of the traditional sandwich? These Burger bombs are packed full of flavor and dipped in a delicious sauce!
    Course Appetizer, Dinner
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 20 burger bombs
    Calories 260kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Ingredients:

    • 20 frozen dinner roll dough thawed
    • 1 pound ground beef
    • ½ cup onion chopped
    • 1 teaspoon minced garlic
    • 1 tablespoon steak seasoning or seasoning salt
    • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
    • 1 cup cheddar cheese shredded
    • 2 ounces cream cheese softened
    • 4 tablespoons chopped cooked bacon
    • ¼ cup dill pickles chopped
    • ¼ cup ketchup
    • 2 tablespoon Dijon mustard
    • 1 egg beaten with 1 teaspoon cold water
    • 2 tablespoons sesame seeds

    Sauce:

    • ½ cup mayonnaise
    • 1 teaspoon mustard
    • 2 teaspoons ketchup
    • 1 teaspoon worcestershire sauce
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
    • ½ teaspoon onion powder
    • 1 tablespoon sweet pickle relish

    Instructions

    • Lay the rolls on a parchment lined pan and cover lightly with a towel. Allow to thaw and rise about halfway.
    • Cook the beef, onions and garlic in a pan over medium-high heat until the meat is no longer pink. Season with steak seasoning and Worcestershire sauce.
    • Add the cheese, cream cheese, bacon, chopped pickles, ketchup and Dijon mustard.
    • Flatten the rolls one at a time into round circles and place a heaping tablespoon of the meat filling in the middle. Pinch the sides of the rolls up in the middle and seal well. Make sure they are shaped into a round ball.
    • Place the rolls on the pan and repeat until all the rolls are filled. Brush the rolls with the beaten egg and water. Sprinkle with sesame seeds.
    • Allow to rise for 15 minutes.
    • Heat the oven to 375°. Bake the rolls for 20 minutes until golden brown.
    • While the rolls are baking combine the sauce ingredients together in a bowl and stir well.
    • Let the rolls cool for 5 minutes, then serve with the dipping sauce and enjoy.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1burger bomb | Calories: 260kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 36mg | Sodium: 784mg | Potassium: 171mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 143IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 137mg | Iron: 2mg

    Pumpkin Patch Brownies with Strawberry Pumpkins

    September 6, 2023

    A pan of frosted brownies are topped with strawberries dipped in orange chocolate to look like pumpkins

    Pumpkin Patch Brownies with Strawberry Pumpkins: Fudgy chocolate brownies, creamy Nutella frosting, crushed Oreo dirt, and the most adorable chocolate-covered strawberry pumpkins create a pumpkin patch dessert for your Halloween and Fall get-togethers!

    Oh, I love this time of year! My brain is overflowing with Fall and Halloween food ideas. I can’t wait to break out a big bowl of Halloween snack mix, stir up a batch of Pumpkin Fluff Dip and dig in to this Pumpkin Poke Cake! But first, let’s talk brownies!

    A pan of frosted brownies are topped with strawberries dipped in orange chocolate to look like pumpkins

    Why You’ll Love This Pumpkin Patch Recipe

    • All the chocolate! Our pumpkin batch brownies start with a fudgy brownie base (made from a boxed brownie mix), get a layer of chocolate hazelnut frosting, a layer of rich dark Oreo crumbs, and finally, a dozen chocolate-covered strawberries. YUM!
    • Kid friendly! These brownies would be a fun Fall activity for a homeschool co-op day or play date. From spreading the frosting to dipping the strawberries, there are tons of ways kids can have so much fun and help make these Halloween treats.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Get the full recipe card with the instructions below!

    The brownies:

    • One box of brownie mix (for a 9×13 pan) + the ingredients required per the package directions

    Strawberry pumpkins:

    • 16 oz. strawberries
    • 12 oz. package of orange candy melts

    The frosting:

    • 2 sticks of unsalted butter, softened
    • 1 cup Nutella
    • 2 cups powdered sugar
    • 1 teaspoon pure vanilla extract
    • ⅛ teaspoon salt
    • 2 tablespoons heavy whipping cream

    For the Oreo crumb dirt topping

    • 15 Oreo chocolate sandwich cookies, crushed

    Pumpkin patch vines and leaves

    • 1 package of fresh mint leaves
    The ingredients to make pumpkin patch brownies with strawberry pumpkins are displayed on a white background

    Instructions for the Pumpkin Patch Brownies

    1. Preheat the oven according to the package directions on the box of brownie mix and prepare a 9×13 baking pan with non-stick cooking spray.
    2. In a large bowl, prepare the brownie mix according to the package directions.
    3. Pour the batter into the prepared baking pan and spread it evenly. Bake the brownies as per the instructions and allow the pan of brownies to cool completely before frosting and decorating.
    A simple photo with a pan of brownie batter spread in a white 9 inch by 13 inch baking dish
    Brownie batter
    A 9 inch by 13 inch baking dish with fudgy chocolate baked brownies
    Allow brownies to cool

    How to Make the Strawberry Pumpkins

    1. Wash and dry the strawberries completely. Then, line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
    2. Place the orange candy melts in a microwave safe bowl and microwave them according to package instructions until the candy melts are smooth and creamy. Be careful not to overheat the candy melts as they can scorch and become thick.
    3. Holding the leaves of each strawberry, dip each berry in the melted chocolate and place it on the parchment lined pan. Leave the strawberries at room temperature to allow the chocolate to harden. The candy melts do harden relatively fast, so try to work quickly. You only need to dip one strawberry for each brownie, so I normally make 12 -15 strawberry pumpkins for a 9×13 pan of pumpkin patch brownies.
    A plate of strawberries sits next to a baking dish prepared with parchment paper and a small bowl of smooth orange candy melts for dipping
    Prepare strawberries for dipping
    A plate of strawberries are waiting to be dipped in orange chocolate melts
    Dip strawberries
    1. Pour the leftover chocolate in a piping bag with a Wilson #4 tip inserted. If you don’t have a piping bag, you can use a small resealable food storage bag and snip off a small piece of the corner of the bag to use to pipe the lines on the strawberry pumpkins.
    2. Squeeze the chocolate slowly to the tip or corner of the bag and pipe small vertical lines around each strawberry to make the pumpkin ‘ridges’. Return the strawberries to the parchment lined tray to fully set.
    A hand holds a piping bag fitting with a small piping tip filled with melted orange chocolate
    Piping bag
    Close up photo of a orange chocolate covered strawberries are being piped to look like pumpkins
    Pipe lines

    Instructions for the Nutella frosting

    1. Place the Nutella in a microwave-safe bowl for about 15 seconds and stir. The Nutella will not be fully melted, just softened a bit. If it seems hot, allow it to cool slightly or it will melt the butter.
    2. In a large mixing bowl, cream the butter until it is smooth and fluffy. Add the Nutella and mix it until it is incorporated with the butter. Add the powdered sugar gradually and mix until combined.
    3. Add vanilla extract, salt and the heavy whipping cream and mix until combined. Set the frosting aside.
    A hand is holding a teaspoon of vanilla extract and is ready to add it to a bowl with the ingredients to make homemade Nutella buttercream
    Make the frosting
    A bowl of creamy fluffy light brown homemade Nutella buttercream frosting
    Homemade Nutella buttercream

    For the Oreo “dirt” topping:

    1. Place the Oreo cookies into a food processor and pulse until you have crumbs. If you don’t have a food processor, place the cookies into a large zip top bag and use a rolling pin to crush the cookies into crumbs. Place the Oreo dirt into a bowl and set it aside.

    Assemble the Pumpkin Patch Brownies

    1. Frost the pan of brownies with the Nutella buttercream. (Stir frosting to bring it to spreading consistency if necessary.)
    2. Sprinkle the top of the brownies with the crushed Oreo dirt. Make sure to get an even layer of crumbs on top of the frosting.
    A pan of brownies is being frosted with fluffy Nutella frosting
    Frost the brownies
    A frosted pan of brownies is being sprinkled with crushed Oreos to make the patch for Pumpkin Patch Brownies
    Add the Oreo dirt
    1. Arrange the strawberry pumpkins on top of the dessert.
    2. Place fresh mint sprigs between the strawberries to make the vines and leaves in the pumpkin patch.
    A hand is placing a chocolate covered strawberry on a pan of pumpkin patch brownies
    Add strawberry pumpkins
    A hand is placing sprigs of fresh mint on a pan of pumpkin patch brownies with Oreo dirt and chocolate covered strawberry pumpkins
    Add mint leaves

    How cute are these brownies?! Those strawberry pumpkins are just my favorite thing. You could even sprinkle these sweet and spicy pumpkin seeds on top!

    pumpkin patch brownies in a white baking dish

    To serve the brownies, cut them into squares and place a strawberry pumpkin in the center of each brownie. You can even sprinkle a little bit of the Oreo dirt on each plate.

    It would also be super fun to serve a slice of these brownies with these Nutter Butter Mummies!

    I’m pretty sure this easy dessert with become a Fall staple around your home! Honestly, brownies topped with chocolate-covered strawberries may be the only way I serve brownies from here on out.

    A fudgy brownie is topped with a chocolate covered strawberry pumpkin and accompanied by a silver fork on a white dessert plate.

    Substitutions

    We think these pumpkin patch brownies should show up at all of your fun Fall festivities, so we have some suggested substitutions below that might fit your family and lifestyle.

    • Brownies: We love the time-saving step of using a box brownie mix but you can really save time with pre-made brownies from your local bakery or grocery store. If you have the time or just prefer a from-scratch recipe, bake up a pan of homemade brownies. (Check out our brownie recipes for inspiration!)
    • Bake a Cake: If your family prefers, you can bake a chocolate cake as the base of this cute Halloween dessert.
    • Frosting: While this dreamy Nutella frosting is pretty scrumptious, you can easily use store-bought frosting for these brownies. Pro tip: whip a tub of store-bought frosting with a stand mixer or hand mixer for a lighter, fluffier consistency!

    Variations

    We have several ways to customize this fun dessert for your family!

    • Feel free to switch up the flavors of the frosting to complement the brownies. Try caramel buttercream, peanut butter frosting, chocolate butter cream or this fan favorite, Oreo buttercream! You can also use your favorite flavor of Oreo cookies. We prefer the dark chocolate cookies to make the Oreo dirt, but you can use the golden Oreos if that is what you can find.
    • Instead of fresh mint, use green frosting (tint vanilla frosting with green food coloring) or green icing to pipe small green lines for vines and leaves for the pumpkin patch.
    • Using paper and toothpicks or skewers, make pumpkin patch signs to place in the pan of brownies or in each individual brownie. You could also make little signs with your guests’ names at a Halloween party.
    • Make these into fun Halloween brownies by piping on jack-o-lantern faces or adding spooky candy eyes to the chocolate covered strawberry pumpkins.
    • Decorate the top of these brownies with pumpkin candies or candy corn.
    Brownies topped with chocolate covered strawberry pumpkins are plated on white plates surrounded by fresh mint and a bowl full of bright red strawberries

    How to Store These Pumpkin Patch Brownies

    You can store the brownies in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days. (The Oreo crumbs may soften, but they will still taste great.) I recommend storing the strawberries for 1-2 days in a separate container lined with a paper towel to collect any condensation.

    I would not recommend storing the brownies in the freezer.

    A close up of a pan of pumpkin patch brownies with crushed Oreo dirt and a patch of orange chocolate covered strawberries that look like pumpkin

    Top Tip

    While you can make the brownies and frosting ahead of time, for the best results, we recommend that you make the Oreo dirt crumbs, the strawberry pumpkins and assemble the brownies on the day you are going to serve them.

    More Recipes You’ll Love

    If you’re a fan of chocolate covered strawberries, you’ll love seeing how we made these pink chocolate covered strawberries!

    Or, if you’re an Oreo fan as much as we are, then this Oreo dessert is going to be a new favorite!

    Tis the season… if you’re in to pumpkin “everything” then also make sure to check out this delicious pumpkin cheesecake bar recipe and a similar pumpkin cheesecake bites recipe!

    Or of course, this easy pumpkin pie is a great choice to make for the holidays, too!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    A pan of frosted brownies are topped with strawberries dipped in orange chocolate to look like pumpkins
    Print Pin
    5 from 5 votes

    Pumpkin Patch Brownies with Strawberry Pumpkins

    Fudgy chocolate brownies, creamy Nutella frosting, crushed Oreo dirt and the most adorable chocolate covered strawberry pumpkins create a pumpkin patch dessert!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 14 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 23 minutes minutes
    Total Time 37 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 brownies
    Calories 689kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Brownies

    • 1 box brownie mix plus ingredients required on the package

    Chocolate covered strawberry pumpkins

    • 16 oz strawberries
    • 12 oz orange candy melts

    Frosting

    • 2 sticks unsalted butter softened
    • 1 cup Nutella®
    • 2 cups powdered sugar
    • 1 teaspoon pure vanilla extract
    • ⅛ teaspoon salt
    • 2 tbs heavy whipping cream

    Oreo crumb dirt topping

    • 15 Oreos crushed

    Pumpkin patch leaves & vines

    • 1 package Mint leaves

    Instructions

    To make the brownies

    • Preheat the oven according to the package directions on the box of brownies and prepare a 9×13 baking pan with non-stick cooking spray.
    • In a large bowl, prepare the brownie mix according to the package directions.
    • Pour batter into the prepared baking pan and spread it evenly. Bake brownies as per the instructions and allow the pan of brownie to cool completely before frosting and decorating.

    Make strawberry pumpkins

    • Wash and dry the strawberries completely. Then, line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
    • Place the orange candy melts in a microwave safe bowl and microwave them according to package instructions until the candy melts are smooth and creamy.
    • Holding the leaves of each strawberry, dip each berry in the melted chocolate and place it on the parchment lined pan. Leave the strawberries at room temperature to allow the chocolate to harden.
    • Pour the leftover chocolate in a piping bag with a #4 Wilson tip inserted. (See notes if you don't have a piping bag.)
    • Squeeze the chocolate slowly to the piping tip and pipe small vertical lines around each strawberry to make the pumpkin 'ridges'. Return the strawberries to the parchment lined tray to full set.

    Instructions for the Nutella frosting

    • Place the Nutella in a microwave safe bowl for about 15 seconds and stir. The Nutella will not be fully melted, just softened a bit. It is seems hot, allow it cool slightly or it will melt the butter.
    • In a large mixing bowl, cream the butter until it is smooth and fluffy. Add the Nutella and mix it until it is incorporated with the butter. Add the powdered sugar gradually and mix to combine.
    • Add vanilla extract, salt and heavy whipping cream and mix until combined. Set the frosting aside.

    Assemble the Pumpkin Patch brownies

    • Frost the pan of brownies with the Nutella buttercream.
    • Sprinkle the top of the brownies with the crushed Oreo dirt. Make sure to get an even layer of crumbs on top of the frosting.
    • Arrange the strawberry pumpkins on top of the Oreo dirt.
    • Place fresh mint springs between the strawberries to make the vines and leaves in the pumpkin patch.

    Video

    Notes

    • If you prefer, you can make these brownies in an 9×9 or 8×8 square pan, just adjust the baking time accordingly.
    • Be careful not to overheat the candy melt as they can scorch/burn and become thick.
    • The candy melts do harden relatively quickly, so try to work quickly.
    • You only need to dip one strawberry for each brownie, so I normally make 12-15 strawberry pumpkins for a 9×13 pan of pumpkin patch brownies.
    • If you don’t have a piping bag, you can pour the chocolate into a small resealable food-storage bag (small ziploc bag) and snip off a tiny corner of the bag to use to pipe the lines on the strawberry pumpkins.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1brownie | Calories: 689kcal | Carbohydrates: 90g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 22g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 43mg | Sodium: 233mg | Potassium: 203mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 70g | Vitamin A: 517IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 43mg | Iron: 4mg

    S’mores Dip

    September 5, 2023

    S'mores Dip in cast iron pan.

    S’mores Dip is a delicious way to enjoy a campfire dessert for a crowd! No crowding around a fire, building a snack. Simply dip a graham cracker in to this melty chocolate and toasted large marshmallows, getting all your favorite flavors of this chocolatey dip for a delicious dessert recipe.

    For the fall, we think you’ll also love this pumpkin fluff and these cast iron brownies!

    Post originally created in July 2021, recipe updated in September 2023.

    S'mores dip in cast iron pan.

    This easy recipe is one of our favorite dessert dips for the cooler months, when entertaining but is also amazing as just a fun snack idea with the kids during a football game or movie nights. This hot chocolate dip is also another fun, no-bake dessert in the cooler months.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    ❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Only 2 ingredients: Melted Hershey Bars and gooey marshmallows, are all that’s required for this recipe and then you can choose to dip whatever you prefer in it! Graham crackers are the obvious choice but you can also use other items such as vanilla wafers or even fresh fruit. However, there are more ideas below of what you can serve with this delicious dip.
    • Ready in under 30 minutes: This classic campfire treat is made in the oven and is ready to enjoy in under 30 minutes!

    🧾 Ingredients Needed

    You don’t need a lot for this easy treat. See what we used below and other additional ideas for dipping or substitutions.

    Ingredients on marble counter for smores dip.
    • Marshmallows – Although we always use large marshmallows, using regular marshmallows mini marshmallows, or even marshmallow fluff may work just as well.
    • Hershey Bars – Using regular Hershey candy bars for this recipe is preferred but you may also choose to use mini Hershey bars, milk chocolate chips, or maybe even something fun like Reese’s Cups. You may even prefer to use dark chocolate or semi-sweet chocolate chips.

    🍳 Equipment

    A cast iron skillet is recommended for this so it can bake in the oven nicely but you may also try a baking dish or pie plate if you don’t have a cast-iron skillet.

    👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make Smores Dip

    It’s recommended to make this right when you’re ready to enjoy it, as the marshmallows could get hard and the chocolate could harden.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Preheat the oven to 450 degrees and prepare a large cast iron skillet with non-stick cooking spray.  

    Steps 1-4 of how to make smores dip.

    STEP 1. Add chocolate. Break the Hershey bars along the indentions and add to the bottom of the skillet, spreading evenly. 

    STEPS 2 & 3. Add marshmallows. Top with the marshmallows by placing in a single layer, and place them side by side all facing the same direction. 

    STEP 4. Cook skillet for 12 – 14 minutes or until the tops of the marshmallows are golden brown. 

    When done, remove from heat and dip graham crackers into the dip immediately to serve.

    Hand dipping graham cracker in to smores dip.

    💭 Recipe Pro Tips

    • Arranging the marshmallows. The marshmallows should be flush against one another with little wiggle room. However, they shouldn't be so packed that it makes some mallows stuck up from the pressure when they become toasted marshmallows.
    • Better presentation. For the dip to look even better, stand all of the marshmallows up on their ends, instead of placing them on their sides or in different directions.
    Smores dip in cast iron pan.

    📋 Recipe FAQs

    What can I use instead of graham crackers for Smores?

    Fresh fruits, cookies, and sweet crackers are great options for dipping, instead of graham crackers.

    What goes good with s’mores?

    You can also add fun items to s’mores like peanut butter, chocolate syrup, or even pumpkin pie filling.

    🍽 What to Serve with S’mores Dip

    Graham crackers are the most popular to serve with this favorite campfire treat. However, here are some other suggestions that we think you’ll love serving with this delicious s'mores dip.

    • Oreo cookies
    • graham cracker sticks
    • peanut butter cookies
    • fresh strawberries
    • potato chips (Yes! The salty and sweet contrast can be great!)

    ❄️ Storage

    If you have leftover smores dip, it will be best to store it in an airtight container although it may be easier to leave in the baking dish so it can be reheated easily.

    🍫 More S’mores Recipes You’ll Love

    Skip the fire pit this year and make more Smores recipes with our favorite below, or at least recipes that are similar, like that delicious Booty Dip (or cannoli dip).

    • The PUMPKIN White Chocolate Smores are INCREDIBLE!
      Pumpkin White Chocolate Smores
    • Air fryer smores stacked on top of one another.
      Air Fryer S’mores
    • Smores Cheesecake - No Bake Recipe
      No-Bake S’Mores Cheesecake Recipe
    • A bowl of booty dip surrounded by crackers and with two graham crackers in the dip.
      Booty Dip

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    S'mores Dip in cast iron pan.
    Print Pin
    5 from 5 votes

    S’mores Dip

    Making smores dip is easy and great for a crowd, using Hershey candy bars and large marshmallows, and baking it in the oven.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 12 minutes minutes
    Total Time 22 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 250kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 12 1.55 ounce Hershey Candy Bars broken in to small pieces
    • 1 pound marshmallows original size (not mini and not jumbo)
    • graham crackers for garnishing

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 450 degrees and prepare a large cast iron skillet with non-stick cooking spray. 
    • Break the Hershey bars along the indentions and add to the bottom of the skillet, spreading evenly. 
    • Top with Marshmallows, placed side by side all facing the same direction. Cook skillet for 12 – 14 minutes or until the tops of the marshmallows are golden brown. 
    • When done, remove from heat and dip graham crackers into the dip immediately to serve. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 250kcal | Carbohydrates: 63g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 0.5mg | Sodium: 62mg | Potassium: 4mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 45g | Calcium: 6mg | Iron: 0.2mg

    Easy Sausage Pasta Bake

    September 4, 2023

    Sausage pasta bake in white baking dish.

    The Easy Sausage Pasta Bake is not just an easy meal. The pasta is coated in a marinara sauce, surrounded by flavorful sausage, and topped off with a generous sprinkle of mozzarella cheese for a delicious flavor combination. 

    As with our other pasta recipes, this one is comfort food at its best, promising a burst of flavors with each bite. (You’re also going to love this Blackened Chicken Alfredo!)

    What makes this dish even more irresistible is its simplicity and speed – you’ll have this hearty dish and crowd-pleasing dinner on the table in no time.

    Baked sausage pasta bake in white baking dish.

    Still, have some sausages to use? First, check out my tips on How to Cook Sausages in the Oven and find new ways to enjoy them. Then you could try Sausage and Egg Casserole for a weekend brunch.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    ❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Easy to make: By using a good quality sauce, this becomes a very simple recipe to make.
    • Big batch meal: You can easily double the ingredients to make a big batch if you have lots of mouths to feed!
    • Ready in only 45 minutes: This recipe, from start to finish, only takes 45 minutes so you don’t need to start cooking long before you need to serve it.

    🧾 Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for sausage pasta bake.
    • Sausage – We use the mild Jimmy Dean’s sausages for this recipe as the kids love them and they aren’t too strongly flavored.
    • Sauce – Prego Three Cheese Sauce is our go-to option for this recipe but you can use any spaghetti sauce you like.
    • Pasta – Spiral pasta works well for this recipe as the sauce sticks to it nicely and it is less messy than something like spaghetti! Rigatoni pasta is another great choice.

    📖 Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Sausage – You can use a hot Italian sausage or even something like a turkey sausage in this recipe depending on what everyone enjoys.
    • Pasta – Swap the spirals for any other type of pasta that holds sauce well so something like penne would work perfectly if that’s what you have handy.

    📖 Variations

    Here are a few easy variations you can try:

    • Vegetable Boost: Add a handful of your favorite vegetables to the mix. Bell peppers, zucchini, or even spinach could offer a welcome crunch and added nutritional value.
    • Cheese Variety: While mozzarella is a classic choice, feel free to experiment with different cheeses. A blend of parmesan and cheddar, for instance, could add a new depth of flavor.
    • Meat Alternatives: If you want to go meatless, replace the sausages with a plant-based substitute or add in some hearty mushrooms.
    • Spice it Up: For those who enjoy a bit of heat, consider adding some crushed red pepper flakes, chili flakes, or a dash of cayenne to the sauce.
    • Seafood Variant: Swap the sausages for shrimp or scallops for a delicious seafood twist. Remember to adjust cooking times accordingly! 

    👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make Easy Sausage Pasta Bake

    This sausage pasta bake is broken into 2 components:

    • prepare the ingredients
    • bake everything together

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    STEP 1: Heat the oven. Preheat the oven to 350°.

    STEP 2: Cook the sausage. In a skillet, crumble the sausage into clumps and sauté with onion until the cooked sausage is browned and the onion is tender. When halfway through cooking, incorporate garlic and continue cooking for an additional 2 minutes. Remove any excess grease by draining. (Image 1)

    Steps 1-4 of how to make sausage pasta bake.

    STEP 3: Make the sauce. In a spacious pot, combine spaghetti sauce with basil, oregano, parsley, salt, and sugar. Allow the mixture to simmer gently for approximately 20 minutes, ensuring to stir occasionally. (Images 2 & 3)

    STEP 4: Cook pasta. Prepare spiral pasta as per the instructions provided. (Image 4)

    Steps 5-8 on how to make a sausage pasta bake.

    STEP 5: Combine and add to the oven. Combine the sausage, onion, garlic cloves, and spiral pasta with the spaghetti sauce, ensuring they are well-mixed. Transfer the mixture to a large baking dish and sprinkle the top generously with mozzarella cheese. (Images 5 – 8)

    STEP 6: Cook and serve. Bake until the cheese is perfectly melted and golden brown, creating a delightful and gooey texture.

    Serving of sausage pasta bake on white plate.

    💭 Recipe Pro Tips

    • Choosing the right sausage: For the best flavor, consider using a high-quality sausage. It’ll add significant depth to the dish. 
    • Pasta cooking tip: Cook the pasta until it's just under al dente. Remember, it will continue to cook in the oven, which will prevent it from becoming too soft.
    • Cheese selection: While we recommend using mozzarella, feel free to experiment with other cheeses like sharp cheddar or even gruyere for a more unique flavor.
    • Baking dish: Choose a deep baking dish to accommodate all the ingredients and prevent the sauce from bubbling over.
    Fork holding a bite of sausage pasta bake.

    📋 Recipe FAQs

    Do you boil pasta before pasta bake?

    Yes, you should boil the pasta before incorporating it into the pasta bake. However, it’s crucial to only cook the pasta until it’s just under al dente, as it will continue to cook in the oven. This helps to prevent the pasta from becoming overly soft and losing texture after baking.

    Can you prepare this pasta bake in advance?

    Absolutely! This recipe can be prepared up to the point of baking and refrigerated overnight. Just be sure to allow extra baking time because the pasta bake will be starting from a chilled state.

    Can I use a different type of meat?

    Yes, this recipe is very versatile and can work with various types of meat. You can substitute the sausage with ground beef, chicken, or turkey. Remember to adjust the cooking times accordingly.

    I’m vegetarian. What can I use instead of sausage?

    For those following a vegetarian diet, you can replace the sausage with a plant-based substitute or use a variety of vegetables like bell peppers, zucchini, mushrooms, or eggplants for added heartiness.

    What if I don’t have all the herbs listed?

    While the combination of basil, oregano, and parsley creates a flavorful pasta sauce, you can adapt to what you have available. Italian seasoning is a great substitute that combines several herbs in one.

    🍽 What to Serve with Sausage Pasta Bake

    The Easy Sausage Pasta Bake is a hearty meal in itself, but a few complementary sides can elevate your dining experience even further. A simple, fresh green side salad with a tangy vinaigrette can cut through the richness of the pasta, providing a refreshing contrast. 

    For a cozy, comforting meal, serve with a side of garlic bread or plain crusty bread to mop up any delicious tomato sauce. Alternatively, a steamed vegetable medley or roasted Brussels sprouts can add some nutritional value and color to the dish. 

    ❄️ Storage

    Leftovers of the Easy Sausage Pasta Bake can be stored in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Make sure to cool it completely before transferring it to an airtight container. When ready to serve, reheat in the microwave or in the oven at 350° until warmed through. You may even want to try making fried spaghetti out of the leftovers!

    As for freezing, yes, this pasta bake is freezer-friendly! Prepare the pasta bake as directed, but hold off on baking. Allow it to cool completely, then cover it tightly with both plastic wrap and aluminum foil or transfer it to a large freezer bag and press out as much air as possible before sealing. You can store it in the freezer for up to 2 months. 

    When ready to eat, thaw overnight in the refrigerator, then bake as directed. Note that the texture of the pasta might be a bit softer after freezing but the flavors will still be delicious.

    🍝 More Pasta Recipes You’ll Love

    We love pasta because there are so many ways to cook and serve it. One easy weeknight meal is the Instant Pot Cajun Pasta , which is full of flavor but also easy to cook if you have an Instant Pot. Or if time is short, try this 30-Minute Taco Pasta Recipe as a great option that has loads of taste without tons of work. And finally, this Meatball Casserole is hearty, comforting, and great for busy weeknights.

    • Mac and Cheese with Ham in bowl.
      Mac and Cheese with Ham
    • Chicken macaroni salad in a bowl.
      The BEST Chicken Macaroni Salad
    • Chicken Caesar Pasta Salad in big bowl, sitting on napkin.
      Chicken Caesar Pasta Salad Recipe
    • Shrimp Pasta Salad With Mayo
      Shrimp Macaroni Salad

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Sausage pasta bake in white baking dish.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Easy Sausage Pasta Bake

    The Easy Sausage Pasta Bake is a simple and delicious option for a main meal for the whole family, that uses simple ingredients.
    Course Dinner
    Cuisine Italian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 35 minutes minutes
    Total Time 45 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 612kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 16 ounce Jimmy Deans sausage mild
    • 1 small onion chopped
    • 2 cloves garlic minced
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 pound spiral pasta
    • 48 ounces spaghetti sauce I like to use Prego Three Cheese
    • 1 ½ teaspoon dried basil
    • 1 ½ teaspoon dried oregano
    • ½ tablespoon parsley
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 4 teaspoon sugar
    • ½ cup mozzarella cheese optional

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350°.
    • Cook spiral pasta according to direction.
    • In a skillet, break up the sausage into clumps and onion until the sausage is browned and the onion is soft.
    • Halfway through cooking, add in garlic and cook for an additional 2 minutes.
    • Drain.
    • In a large pot, add spaghetti sauce, basil, oregano, parsley, salt, and sugar, and let it simmer for about 20 minutes. Stir in between.
    • Transfer the sausage together with onion and garlic and spiral pasta into the spaghetti sauce and combine well.
    • Pour into a 13×9 casserole dish. Sprinkle mozzarella cheese on top.
    • Put in the oven until the cheese is melted.

    Notes

    Tips:
    You can choose to substitute mild sausage for hot sausage or turkey sausage.
    Can you make this pasta in advance?
    Yes! This can be prepared up to the point of baking and then be refrigerated overnight. Just be sure to allow extra baking time because the pasta bake will be starting from a chilled state.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 612kcal | Carbohydrates: 62g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 65mg | Sodium: 813mg | Potassium: 414mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 103IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 97mg | Iron: 2mg

    Oreo Mug Cake

    September 1, 2023

    Oreo mug cake with a spoon dipped in.

    Oreo Mug Cake: Did you know that you can make an Oreo mug cake using 2 simple ingredients? That’s right. This simple 2-ingredient Oreo mug cake recipe is going to be your new favorite go-to late-night snack and trust us, this single-serving dessert recipe is the best easy mug cake recipe out there!

    With this vanilla mug cake recipe being so popular, we knew that this other mug cake would be something you’d love too when we added it to our other cake recipes. If you love desserts for two, then you’ll also want to check out this mini chocolate cake recipe too!

    Oreo mug cake with a spoon.

    I am a huge fan of Oreo recipes, and the easier the better! Before I put together this delicious Oreo mug cake recipe, my late-night Oreo dessert go-tos were this Oreo dip (perfect for dipping even more Oreo cookies in) and these Oreo brookies. I highly recommend checking out the Oreo brookies if you have a nightly sweet tooth!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • It uses a few ingredients: With only 2 ingredients, this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand.
    • One mug recipe: Simply throw everything together in your favorite microwave-safe mug and you’re set for this late-night treat!
    • Ready in only 90 seconds: Talk about a quick and easy way to have an after-dinner dessert! Ready in seconds is my kind of favorite dessert recipe.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Carton of milk sitting next to a package of Oreos.
    • Oreo Cookies – We used regular Oreos for this recipe, but you could easily change it up with Golden Oreos or seasonally flavored Oreos like Pumpkin Spice.
    • Milk – We used whole milk for this recipe, but you could easily switch it out for your preferred milk. Please note that using non-dairy milk might change the consistency of the Oreo mug cake.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Oreos – As I mentioned above, playing around with different types of Oreos could easily change up this recipe.
    • Milk – Change up this recipe by using your favorite milk, such as almond milk or soy milk! Or add some extra creamy flavor by using half and half or whipping cream instead of milk.

    Variations

    Something that makes this easy Oreo microwave mug cake recipe so awesome is that it can easily be doubled. Make yourself a bigger batch to share (or to keep for yourself) by doubling, adding to a larger mug, and then adding 30-second increments to the cooking time in the microwave.

    Another alteration you can make would be adding a few extra ingredients to the mug cake, such as chocolate chips or a swirl of peanut butter! Although, for the sake of this recipe, you’ll get the best results by sticking to the how-to.

    How to Make 2 Ingredient Oreo Mug Cake

    Making this simple 90-second Oreo mug cake recipe is as 1, 2, 3, 4!

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    STEP 1. Crush the Oreos: Start by crushing your Oreos as small as you can.

    Tip: Crush your Oreos in a large plastic bag with a rolling pin.

    Steps 1-4 of how to make Oreo mug cake.

    STEP 2. Add Ingredients to Your Mug: Dump the crushed Oreos and measured milk into your favorite microwave-safe mug. You can prepare the mug with some non-stick cooking spray, but it is not necessary.

    STEP 3. Stir: After both ingredients are in the mug, stir well.

    STEP 4. Microwave: Finally, microwave for roughly 90 seconds.

    Cooked Oreo mug cake with spoon lifting out a bite.

    Finish off the recipe by adding your favorite toppings. We loved topping this Oreo mug cake with vanilla ice cream and caramel. They really enhanced the Oreo flavor and were a great idea.

    Some other great topping ideas are:

    • chocolate syrup
    • melted peanut butter
    • marshmallow fluff
    • whipped cream and sprinkles
    • chocolate chips
    • Or whip up the frosting recipe in this chocolate war cake, for an over-the-top topping!
    Oreo mug cake with spoon lifting out whipped cream and caramel sauce.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Eat while warm. Let the mug cake cool slightly after microwaving, but enjoy it warm for the best flavor and texture
    • Make sure to top it. While this recipe is super tasty on its own, it’s made even better with some simple toppings like ice cream or whipped cream!

    Recipe FAQs

    How to tell when the mug cake is done?

    Your mug cake is ready to eat when you’re able to lightly poke the top of the cake and it bounces back, just like a cupcake. If it doesn’t bounce back, add some more time in the microwave.

    Can I make this Oreo mug cake with any cookies?

    We suggest sticking with Oreos for this Oreo mug cake recipe, but attempting the recipe with other cream-filled cookie options might yield the same results!

    Can you double this Oreo mug cake recipe?

    Easily! You can definitely double this Oreo mug cake recipe for a bigger mug cake. We suggest adding 30-60 more seconds in the microwave if you decide to double the recipe. Use the tip above to find out if the doubled recipe is done after that time in the microwave.

    How can I make an Oreo mug cake without baking powder?

    Easily make an Oreo mug cake without baking powder with these two ingredients: crushed Oreos and milk!

    What to Top Your Oreo Mug Cake With

    There are so many creative topping options for your Oreo mug cake and I think that is the best part of this easy recipe! Here are a few tasty ideas that we love:

    • a scoop of ice cream and caramel/chocolate syrup
    • melted peanut butter
    • marshmallow fluff
    • homemade hot fudge sauce
    • whipped cream and sprinkles
    • chocolate chips

    More Oreo Recipes You’ll Love

    If you are a big Oreo fan, you are going to adore these delicious Oreo-centered recipes!

    • A close up of a slice of dessert pizza with a cookie crust, cream cheese icing and chopped Oreo cookies
      Oreo Pizza Recipe
    • Slice of no bake Oreo dessert on plate.
      The BEST Oreo Dessert
    • Oreo mousse in a clear glass single serving container.
      Oreo Mousse
    • Stacked Oreo pancakes on white plate, topped with whipped cream.
      Oreo Pancakes

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Oreo mug cake with a spoon dipped in.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Oreo Mug Cake

    Classic Oreo cookie flavor meets super easy and delicious dessert idea with this 2 ingredient 90 second Oreo mug cake recipe!
    Course Dessert, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 2 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 2 minutes minutes
    Total Time 4 minutes minutes
    Servings 1 cake
    Calories 250kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 4 Oreo cookies
    • 3 tablespoon Whole Milk

    Instructions

    • Crush Oreos. Place the Oreos in a large plastic bag and use a rolling pin to crush them into tiny pieces.
    • Add to Mug. Add the Oreos and milk to a microwave safe mug.
    • Mix. Mix well.
    • Microwave. Microwave for about 90 seconds.
    • Serve. Let the mug cake cool slightly before topping with your favorite toppings and enjoy!

    Notes

    While this Oreo mug cake recipe is delicious as is, it can be made even better with flavored Oreos. Change it up by using Golden Oreos or your favorite Oreo flavor such as mint or chocolate!

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cake | Calories: 250kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 5mg | Sodium: 203mg | Potassium: 180mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 74IU | Calcium: 65mg | Iron: 6mg

    Subway Crab Sandwich Recipe

    August 29, 2023

    Subway Crab Sandwich on white plate.

    If you remember the crab meat Seafood Sensation Sandwich from Subway back in the day, you’ll love this copycat recipe!

    Simple to replicate at home, this recipe provides a perfect alternative when you have a craving for the famous Subway sandwich. It’s definitely one of our easiest sandwich recipes and it’s perfect for a quick lunch idea too!

    Copycat subway crab sandwich on white plate.

    Inspired to try a few more crab recipes? You could try a simple Crab Salad as a tasty and simple light meal. Or combine crab with some pasta to make a Crab Pasta Bake for a heartier meal.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • It uses a few ingredients: With only 5 ingredients, this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand.
    • Make big batches: You can just increase the amount of crab meat you get to feed more people easily.
    • No cook recipe: No need to turn on the oven or the stovetop for this recipe as there’s no cooking involved.

    What is Imitation Crab Meat?

    Imitation crab meat, also known as “krab” or crab sticks, is a type of seafood made from starch and finely pulverized white fish (surimi) that’s been shaped and cured to resemble the leg meat of snow crab or Japanese spider crab. It’s a popular choice in seafood salads, sushi rolls, and now as a star ingredient in our delightful Subway Crab Sandwich. 

    Despite its name, imitation crab meat doesn’t have crab in its composition, but it’s flavored to taste like crab, providing a cost-effective and readily available alternative to the real thing.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of simple ingredients with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the main ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Ingredients to make copycat Subway seafood sensation sandwich.
    • Crab meat – Choose a good quality imitation crab meat to get the best results from your sandwiches. We prefer using Crab Classic brand.
    • Bread – Choose your favorite Subway-style roll for the sandwich as any type will work well.
    • Cheese – White American or Provolone cheese is a great option for this recipe to add a little creaminess.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Imitation Crab Meat: If you prefer using real crab meat, it’s a great option for a more authentic seafood flavor. For a vegetarian option, you could use finely chopped hearts of palm or artichoke hearts, which have similar textures and can absorb flavors well.
    • Cheese: If you’re not a fan of white American or provolone, you can use any type of cheese that melts well. Cheddar and mozzarella both make great alternatives.
    • Bread: If you don’t have a Subway-style roll on hand, French or Italian bread works just as well if cut into the proper sandwich size. We use wheat sandwich bread often too for these BLTs with Avocado, in case you have some of that on hand. BUT… I also did just find out (July 2025) that you can walk in to some Subway’s and only buy the loaves of bread. This is a game changer for this recipe!

    Variations

    • Spicy Crab Sandwich: If you love a kick in your food, consider adding some sliced jalapeños or a dash of hot sauce. This tiny tweak can transform the sandwich into a fiery delight.
    • Crispy Crab Sandwich: Fancy a bit of crunch? Add some crispy lettuce or thinly sliced cucumber. This is a great way to bring freshness and a satisfying crunch that complements the softness of the crab meat and bread.
    • Avocado Crab Sandwich: For a creamy and healthy food twist, try adding some slices of ripe avocado. This will not only enhance the texture but also add a dose of healthy fats to your meal.

    How to Make Subway Crab Sandwich

    This copycat Subway crab sandwich is broken into 2 components:

    • Mix the crab meat
    • Put the sandwich together

    Makes about 4 subs, depending on how much crab salad you put on each sandwich.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    STEP 1: Mix the crab meat. Place the crab meat in a medium-sized bowl and delicately separate any pieces that may be stuck together. (Alternatively, you can shred the crab meat if desired, but larger pieces will resemble the Subway sandwich more closely, as opposed to shredded crab.) (Image 1)

    STEP 2: Add the mayo and salt. Combine mayo and salt, stirring until thoroughly mixed. Here you can add an optional ingredient of black pepper if desired 

    Steps 1-2 of how to make crab meat sandwich.

    STEP 3: Make the sandwich. Place optional slices of cheese on the bread, then spoon generous spoonfuls of the seafood salad in equal portions onto the cheese for each sandwich. The quantity can be adjusted based on your preference for a hearty sandwich. (Image 2)

    Copycat Seafood Sensation Sandwich from Subway.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • For a lighter option: Substitute mayonnaise for light mayonnaise or low-fat version of Greek yogurt. It'll still give you the creaminess without all the calories. However this will alter the taste of the sandwich and it may taste different than the Subway version.
    • Quality matters: Although imitation crab meat is used, don't skimp on the quality. High-quality imitation crab meat will result in a tastier sandwich.
    • Toasting the bread: For a toasty crunch, consider heating up your favorite bakery bread before assembling the sandwich. But remember, it’s not traditional Subway style to toast this particular sandwich.
    • Adding extra veggies: Feel free to add extra veggies on top of the crab salad, like lettuce, tomato, red onion, red pepper, green peppers, white onion slices or cucumber slices for added freshness and crunch. 

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use real crab meat instead of imitation crab meat?

    Yes, you absolutely can! Using real crab meat will give your sandwich a more authentic seafood flavor. Just make sure to properly cook and shred the crab meat before mixing it with the mayo and salt.

    Can I make this sandwich vegetarian?

    For a vegetarian version, you can skip the crab meat and use a combination of diced veggies or mushrooms sautéed with similar seasonings. Vegan seafood substitutes could also work.

    How do I make this sandwich gluten-free?

    To make this sandwich gluten-free, you just need to swap out the bread for a gluten-free option. Remember to check the labels of the other necessary ingredients to ensure they are also gluten-free.

    Can I heat up the crab sandwich?

    While the traditional Subway style is to serve this sandwich cold, you can choose to heat it up if you prefer. You can do this by toasting the bread before assembly or by grilling the sandwich after it’s been put together. Keep in mind that heating may change the texture of the ingredients.

    What to Serve with Subway Crab Sandwich

    These Subway Crab salad Sandwiches are incredibly versatile and can be paired with a variety of sides to make a balanced meal. Here are some suggestions:

    • Chips: A classic accompaniment for sandwiches. Choose from a variety of flavors to complement the taste of the crab sandwich. 
    • Salad: A fresh, side salad is a great, light side dish that pairs well with the richness of the sandwich. Opt for simple greens, a tangy slaw, or a hearty Caesar salad.
    • Soup: Especially on a chilly day, a warm bowl of soup is perfect alongside this sandwich. Try a classic tomato soup, a comforting chicken noodle, or a creamy mushroom soup.
    • Pickles: The tanginess of pickles makes them a perfect contrast to the creaminess of the crab sandwich, adding a bit of a crunch as well. 
    • Fruit: For a healthier option, consider serving a honey lime fruit salad or sliced fresh fruit on the side. The natural sweetness of the fruit pairs well with the savory crab meat.
    • Fries: Whether you prefer regular potato fries, air fried sweet potato fries, or even zucchini fries, they all make a tasty side dish for the sandwich.

    Storage

    Subway Crab Sandwiches are best enjoyed immediately after preparation to fully appreciate the freshness of the ingredients. However, if you need to store them:

    • Refrigeration: Assembled sandwiches can be stored in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours. Make sure to cover them tightly with plastic wrap or place them in an airtight container to prevent the bread from drying out. It’s best to add any crispy vegetables you like just before eating to maintain their crunch.
    • Freezing: While the crab salad itself can be frozen for up to a month, we don’t recommend freezing the assembled sandwiches. The freezing and thawing process can alter the texture of the bread and fresh ingredients. To freeze the crab salad, place it in a sealed container, leaving a bit of space for expansion. When you’re ready to enjoy your sandwich, thaw the crab salad in the refrigerator overnight and assemble your sandwich the next day.

    More Sandwich Recipes You’ll Love

    Got some of those Subway-style rolls left? Then why not try one of these sandwich recipes?  This is definitely The BEST Egg Salad Recipe and you can use a Subway roll for it. Or keep it simple with Turkey Sliders for a filling lunch option.

    • A slice of peach cobbler cheesecake sitting on a plate next to a fork.
      Peach Cobbler Cheesecake (Easy Baked Recipe with Streusel Topping)
    • A slice of Westhaven cake on a round plate.
      Westhaven Cake
    • A slice of shoofly cake sitting on round plate.
      Shoofly Cake
    • Old fashioned potluck cake recipes collage.
      Old-Fashioned Cakes That Still Show Up at Every Potluck

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Subway Crab Sandwich on white plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Subway Crab Sandwich

    If you loved the Subway Seafood Sensation Sandwich, you'll love this easy copycat recipe! Make sure you use the right kind of mayo for this or it won't taste the same!
    Course Lunch
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 sandwiches
    Calories 556kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 14 ounces imitation crab meat flake style is best
    • 1 cup Hellmans Or "Best Foods" brand of mayo
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 4 6-inch Sub bread rolls
    • White American or provolone cheese, 2 per sandwich optional

    Instructions

    • Pour crab meat in medium sized bowl and gently pull pieces apart if stuck together. (You can also shred the crab meat if preferred but the bigger pieces are more similar to the Subway sandwich, instead of shredded crab.)
    • Add mayo and salt, and stir until fully combined.
    • Layer optional slices of cheese on bread, and spoon equal parts of crab salad on to cheese, on each sandwich. (Amount will depend on how hearty you prefer your sandwich.)
      TIP: It's best to let the crab mixture sit in the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes before enjoying, so the flavors come together better.

    Notes

    Makes about 4, 6-inch subs, depending on how much crab salad you put on each sandwich.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1sandwich | Calories: 556kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 43g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 25g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 1336mg | Potassium: 51mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 37IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 1mg

    Sugar Cookie Truffles

    August 26, 2023

    Sugar cookie truffles on white plate, with seeing the inside of one.

    Sugar Cookie Truffles! It’s like your favorite sugar cookie took a dip in a pool of awesomeness and came out wearing a white chocolate tuxedo. If you’re all about easy yet impressive, and if the idea of “cookie meets truffle” makes your heart skip a beat, then stick around. We’re about to drop a no-bake dessert recipe that’s as cool as the other side of the pillow.

    Loving the idea of an easy truffle recipe? Then make sure to also check out this Biscoff truffles recipe!

    Sugar cookie truffles sitting on a white plate.

    Whether you’re making truffles for the holidays (like these Easter truffles) or just to enjoy for a sweet tooth, these cookie truffles will be great for a get-together or even for a party of one!

    This recipe uses Lofthouse cookies, although you can use other types of sugar cookies. However, if you’ve never had a Lofthouse cookie, they’re undeniably delicious and are a really soft cookie, topped with a scrumptious buttercream frosting, and are highly recommended for this recipe.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    ❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • 4 Ingredients: With only 4 ingredients required (plus sprinkles if you desire) this is one to remember when you don’t want a big task!
    • Customize the Color: Although adding sprinkles is optional, you can choose your favorite colors for sprinkles for the occasion and you can also add food coloring to your chocolate if you’d prefer a different color truffle completely.
    • Ready in under an hour: These no-bake truffles are ready to enjoy within under an hour!

    🧾 Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic. Make sure to check the full recipe card down below for ingredients and instructions all in one place.

    Labeled ingredients for sugar cookie truffles.

    📖 Substitutions

    If you find that substitutions are needed or wanted, here are some suggestions that may help:

    • Cookie – If you prefer to use a different type of cookie, you can. Any soft cookie in the bakery at the grocery store will work or you can make your own soft sugar cookies too.
    • Cream Cheese – If you don’t want to use cream cheese, you can use frosting instead. You’ll use the same amount as you would the cream cheese.

    👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make Sugar Cookie Truffles

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Steps 1-4 of how to make sugar cookie truffles using Lofthouse cookies.

    STEP 1. Crumble cookies. Place your cookies into the bowl of your mixer and mix on medium speed until fine crumbs.

    STEP 2. Cream cheese. Add in the cream cheese and mix until the mixture is smooth.

    STEP 3. Roll the balls. Scoop about 1.5 tablespoons of the dough. Smush the dough in your hands and roll it into a ball.

    STEP 4. Chill. Place the dough balls onto a sheet pan lined with parchment paper. Place them in the fridge for 3 minutes.

    Tips:
    – Make sure you mix the dough well so it makes a paste.
    – When rolling in to balls, work the dough in your hands to get out any lumps so they’re smooth balls.
    – While rolling the balls, move your hands in different directions to create the circle shape.

    Steps for making no bake sugar cookie truffles.

    STEP 5. Melt Chocolate. Melt your chocolate with half the coconut oil over a double boiler or in the microwave in 30-second increments. Add the rest of the coconut oil if the chocolate is too thick.

    STEP 6. Dip. Without sticking the fork in to one of the balls, pick it up and gently dip in the melted chocolate, covering it completely.

    STEP 7. Remove. Carefully lift the ball out of the chocolate, allowing the excess chocolate to drip off back in to the bowl.

    STEP 8. Rest. Place the chocolate-covered truffles on the sheet pan. Allow the chocolate to set for at least 10 minutes, and enjoy.

    Sugar cookie truffles with sprinkles, on white plate.

    💭 Recipe Pro Tips

    • For the melted chocolate, make sure the chocolate has the same consistency as paint. If your chocolate is too thick, it won’t look as well.
    • Place your sprinkles onto your truffles before the chocolate sets, so they stick.
    Lofthouse sugar cookie truffles on white plate.

    📋 Recipe FAQs

    My chocolate seems too thick. What can I do to help get the right texture?

    Adding more coconut oil will help thin out the chocolate.

    What are Lofthouse cookies, and where do I find them?

    You can typically find these soft, thick, sugar cookies that are topped with a colorful, thick, frosting and are usually in the bakery section of the grocery store.

    Showing the inside of a sugar cookie truffle on a white plate, sitting next to whole truffles.

    ❄️ Storage

    If you have leftover cookies, it’s best to store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 4-5 days.

    🍪 More No-Bake Recipes You’ll Love

    Do you love no-bake desserts like this one? We’ve picked out some of our similar favorite no-bake desserts for you to try too:

    • Rice krispie treats on wooden board.
      The BEST Rice Krispie Treats
    • Close up of cornflake candy cookies
      Cornflake Candy Cookies
    • A sweet cheeseball that has bee rolled in colorful M&M's is centered with pretzels and sugar wafer cookies waiting for dipping
      Chocolate Chip Cheese Ball with M&M’s
    • Chocolate Chip Cookie Dough Fudge
      Cookie Dough Fudge

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Sugar cookie truffles on white plate, with seeing the inside of one.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Sugar Cookie Truffles

    These sugar cookie truffles are made using Lofthouse cookies and a few other ingredients to create a delicious no-bake treat.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 30 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 13 minutes minutes
    Total Time 43 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 truffles
    Calories 187kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 10 Lofthouse Cookies
    • 4 ounces cream cheese
    • 8 ounces white dipping chocolate
    • 1-2 Tablespoons coconut oil
    • Sprinkles optional

    Instructions

    • Place your cookies into the bowl of your mixer and mix on medium speed until fine crumbs.
    • Add in the cream cheese and mix until the mixture is smooth.
    • Scoop about 1.5 tablespoons of the dough. Smush the dough in your hands and roll it into a ball.
    • Place the dough balls onto a sheet pan lined with parchment paper. Place them in the fridge for 3 minutes.
    • Melt your chocolate with half the coconut oil over a double boiler or in the microwave in 30-second increments. Add the rest of the coconut oil if the chocolate is too thick.
    • Dip your balls into the chocolate using a fork and top them with your sprinkles.
    • Place them on the sheet pan. Allow the chocolate to set for at least 10 minutes, and enjoy.

    Notes

    Tips:
    • For the melted chocolate, make sure the chocolate has the same consistency as paint. If your chocolate is too thick, it won’t look as well.
    • Place your sprinkles onto your truffles before the chocolate sets, so they stick.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1truffle | Calories: 187kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 14mg | Sodium: 76mg | Potassium: 74mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 140IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 0.3mg

    Frito Chili Pie

    August 25, 2023

    Fritos, chili, cheese, onions, all piled together in cardboard dish.

    This Frito Chili Pie is the perfect dish to serve for game day, at a party, or for busy weeknights! Top Fritos with this chili recipe, cheese, shredded cheese, green onions, and your favorite toppings!

    Frito Chili Pie Recipe

    If you’re looking for more chili-related recipes, then you’ll love these next! Simple chili recipe, chili mac, vegetarian chili, and white chicken chili! Or use chili to top these chili cheese corn dogs with.

    If we’re having a low-key party, a taco bar or nacho bar is usually the plan. The best thing is that it’s almost like everyone can have their own little Frito pie casserole and top it with whatever toppings they prefer!

    But if I’m being honest, I’ll probably make these AND the burgers in the oven since they’re both easy party foods that can be made in bulk!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is a Frito Chili Pie?

    It’s a layered dish consisting of Fritos Corn Chips, a thick chili recipe, and toppings such as shredded cheese, diced onions and more! Such an easy recipe too!

    Are chili Frito pies like walking tacos?

    Yes! But the difference is that a chili Frito pie would be served right in the small bag of Fritos instead of on a plate, in a bowl or in a food boat.

    Ingredients for Frito Pie

    What you’ll see below, are the ingredients for a basic Frito pie. However, it is so much fun to top the chili pie with your favorite ingredients and I’ll give you a great list of topping ideas below as well, so you’re prepared and ready for the ultimate Frito pie recipe!

    Ingredients for Frito Chili Pie recipe

    Chili Recipe

    You’ll want to start by making the chili. You can either follow the chili recipe I’ve provided below, use this family-favorite chili recipe or use your own favorite chili which can even be canned chili!

    If using the chili recipe included in this post, here are some notes about the key ingredients.

    Make sure to check the recipe card below for the full list of ingredients for the recipe.

    • ground beef (or ground deer meat for venison chili – see more easy ground beef recipes)
    • Rotel – or any brand of diced tomatoes and green chilies.
    • sugar – sugar actually helps offset the acidity in chili!

    Frito Pie Ingredients

    To assemble the Frito pie (as pictured), you’ll need the following, remaining ingredients:

    • Fritos – or your favorite brand of corn chips
    • Shredded cheese – shredding your own always tastes better but pre-shredded is absolutely ok to use!
    • Diced onion – red, white, or yellow onions work

    How to Make a Frito Chili Pie

    Steps 1-4 of how to make Frito chili pie.
    1. In a large skillet or pot, brown the ground beef, onion, and garlic at medium heat. 
    2. Drain excess fat and place back in pot.
    3. Add kidney beans, tomato paste, Rotel, chili powder, salt, sugar, and cumin.  Stir together well. Turn the heat down to medium-low.  Allow the mixture to simmer uncovered for 20 minutes.  
    Frito Boat - corn chips ready for chili
    1. Pour a bag of Fritos corn chips onto a serving dish, or pour a single serving of Fritos onto each person's plate.
    Pour Chili over fritos
    1. Serve a serving of chili over Frito chips.
    Shredded cheddar cheese on chili pie
    1. Sprinkle with shredded cheddar cheese, and any additional toppings! (See list of ideas below!)

    Hint: If your chili is still hot, it should melt the shredded cheese on top. However, if it’s not hot enough, you may want to nuke your Frito pie for a few seconds to get the cheese to melt, if desired!

    Melted cheese on frito chili pie in food boat

    Topping Ideas for Frito Chili Pies

    I don’t know about you but the more the merrier when it comes to toppings for Frito pies! Here are some ideas that you can put out for your family or guests when hosting so they can make it just how they like it!

    • shredded lettuce
    • this delicious guacamole recipe
    • black olives
    • taco sauce
    • sour cream
    • diced onions
    • sliced jalapeno peppers
    • diced tomatoes
    • chopped bell peppers
    • hot sauce
    • ranch dressing or jalapeno ranch dressing
    • fresh cilantro
    • rice
    Frito Chili Pie Toppings

    Storage

    If you have leftovers, it’s best to store the chili, Fritos and toppings, separate so the crunchy corn chips do not get soggy.

    How to Store Chili

    The chili will keep for 3 days in the fridge, if kept in an airtight container. Or, you can freeze it for up to 3 months.  

    How to Store Fritos

    If you don’t have the original bag the Fritos corn chips came in, you can pour them in to a ziptop plastic bag or a bag that’s sealed, in the pantry.

    How to Store Toppings

    If you have chopped toppings left over, it will depend on the topping; however, it’s best to store the toppings separately.

    Frito Chili Pie Recipe

    Variations for a Chili Pie

    Love mixing things up? I do too sometimes! Here are answers to some popular questions:

    Can I use Chili Cheese Fritos instead?
    Absolutely! That’s a great substitution! You can also use Nacho Cheese Doritos, Cool Ranch Doritos or your favorite chips!

    Can I use my own chili recipe?
    Of course! Your chili recipe should work just fine!

    Do you love tater tots?

    Then you’ll LOVE these loaded tater tots!

    Top Tips

    Make a big batch of chili and freeze it, and keep items like Fritos and shredded cheese on hand so you can make this on a weeknight when you need a fast dinner idea!

    Want an even faster recipe?

    Use canned chili or store-bought chili to make this in a flash!

    Slow Cooker Chili

    If you’re hosting a party, make the chili and place it in a slow cooker (or Instant Pot if you have one!) to keep on “warm” so guests can make their own chili pies as they please!

    FAQs and Expert Tips

    What goes well with Frito pie?

    A Frito chili pie can be a main dish in itself and pairs really well with light side dishes like Spanish rice, a vegetable tray, and Instant Pot corn on the cob.

    Could you use other meats for the chili pie instead of beef?

    Absolutely. Feel free to substitue the ground beef for ground turkey, chicken, venison or even pork sausage!

    Are Frito chili pies spicy?

    Not this recipe. However if you use a recipe for a spicy chili, it can be. If you prefer a spicy Frito pie, you can add hot sauce and or spices like chili powder or cayenne pepper.

    More Easy Dinner Recipes

    If you’re a fan of quick and easy dinners, you’ll also love these popular dinner recipes: Doritos Chicken Casserole and BBQ Nachos (using leftover meats)!

    Then if you really loved this chili pie, you’re really going to love this layered taco dip and pizza monkey bread because they’re family favorites!

    Recipe

    Fritos, chili, cheese, onions, all piled together in cardboard dish.
    Print Pin
    4.82 from 11 votes

    Easy Frito Chili Pie

    This Frito Chili Pie is the perfect dish to serve for game day, at a party or for busy weeknights! Top Fritos with this chili recipe, cheese, shredded cheese, green onions, and your favorite toppings!
    Course Appetizer, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 597kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Family Favorite Chili Recipe

    • Alternate Easy Chili Recipe Get Easy Chili Recipe Here!

    Another Optional Chili Recipe

    • 1 pound ground beef
    • 1 medium onion diced
    • 1 clove garlic minced
    • 14 ounces can of kidney beans undrained
    • 5.5 ounces can tomato paste
    • 10 ounces can rotel diced tomatoes and green chilies
    • 2 tablespoons chili powder
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 1 teaspoon sugar
    • 1.5 teaspoon ground cumin

    Making the Frito Pie

    • 9.25 ounces bag of Fritos
    • 1 cup shredded cheddar cheese if desired

    Instructions

    • In a large skillet or pot, brown the ground beef, onion, and garlic at medium heat.
    • Drain excess fat.
    • Add kidney beans, tomato paste, rotel, chili powder, salt, sugar, and cumin and stir until evenly blended.
    • Turn the heat down to medium-low and allow the mixture to simmer uncovered for 20 minutes.
    • Pour a bag of fritos onto a serving dish, or pour a single serving of fritos onto each person's plate.  
    • Serve the chili over Fritos and sprinkle with shredded cheddar cheese, and use desired toppings. (See additional topping ideas in notes!)

    Notes

    Additional Topping Ideas:
    • shredded lettuce
    • easy guacamole recipe
    • black olives
    • taco sauce
    • sour cream
    • diced onions
    • sliced jalapeno peppers
    • diced tomatoes
    • chopped bell peppers
    • hot sauce
    • ranch dressing or jalapeno ranch dressing
    • fresh cilantro
    • rice

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 597kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 1218mg | Potassium: 896mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 1438IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 283mg | Iron: 5mg

    John Wayne Casserole

    August 25, 2023

    Serving of John Wayne Casserole on a white plate.

    What is John Wayne Casserole? It’s a delicious dish made up of ground beef and pork, taco seasoning, veggies, and a creamy base of cheeses.

    Casserole recipes are a great easy dinner idea because most of them consist of a combination of items that can be baked all together, and the result is a delicious blend of flavors!

    Serving of John Wayne Casserole being lifted out of baking dish.

    If you love a meat and cheese casserole like this great recipe, then you’re also going to love similar recipes like this cheeseburger casserole, this hamburger hashbrown casserole, and this french onion casserole!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • It’s hearty: If you’re looking for a fulfilling dish, this hearty casserole is the one! Full of meat and cheeses, it’s loaded with protein.
    • For a potluck: Need a dish to take to a gathering? This dish will be the star of the show with the jalapenos, and how it looks different than the other dishes!

    Ingredients Needed

    Head on over to the grocery store to grab the following simple ingredients for this easy casserole recipe. Don't forget to scroll to the recipe card for exact measurements. 

    Labeled ingredients for John Wayne casserole.

    We’ve provided a few notes about some of the ingredients in case you find it helpful:

    • Crescent Roll dough - Store-bought or homemade pizza dough will work here as well. You can use a rolling pin to roll the dough out to line the bottom and sides of the casserole dish. Some may even prefer a biscuit crust.
    • Ground pork - You could use ground beef or ground turkey instead if you'd like. 
    • Green bell peppers - You can slice or chop the bell pepper. The choice is yours. Or you could even use a red bell pepper if you prefer.
    • Sweet onion - Yellow or white onions will work as well. 
    • Rotel - Feel free to use fresh diced tomatoes and chilis instead. 
    • Canned jalapenos - Not a spicey fan? Go ahead and leave the jalapenos out. 
    • Mayonnaise - Miracle Whip will work here too.  
    • Shredded cheddar cheese - Cheddar is my favorite but Monterey jack or Colby jack cheese would make great substitutions. 

    Note: Corn Makes an excellent optional ingredient to this recipe! Just add a layer of 1 cup of sweet corn between the meat and peppers. We even used southwest corn in this walking taco casserole recipe!

    Equipment

    Here's what you'll need in terms of supplies to make this original John Wayne casserole recipe.

    • 9 X 13-inch baking dish 
    • Large heavy-bottomed skillet
    • Spoon or spatula for mixing
    • Mixing bowl
    • Oven

    How to Make John Wayne Casserole

    *Be sure to see the printable recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    This easy ground beef casserole recipe is easy to make but we still want to show you the steps of how to make this so it’s helpful!

    Prep. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F and grease (or use parchment paper) a 9 X 13-inch baking pan with non-stick cooking spray. 

    Steps 1-4 of how to make John Wayne Casserole.

    STEP 1. Make the crust. Line the pan with the Crescent Roll dough. The dough should completely cover the bottom and stretch to the sides of the pan. Bake for 10 minutes.

    STEP 2. Remove. Remove the pan from the oven and set aside.

    STEP 3. Cook the meat. Using a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the beef, pork, and taco seasoning and sauté until the meat mixture is browned and cooked through, breaking it up and mixing as you go. Drain and remove the meat from the skillet. 

    STEP 4. Cook the veggies. In the same skillet, sauté the bell pepper and diced onions until softened. 

    Tip: If you don’t want the casserole too spicy, you can leave off the jalapeno peppers.

    Steps 5-8 on how to make John Wayne Casserole.

    STEP 5. Assemble the casserole. Spread the seasoned, cooked meat over the Crescent Roll crust followed by the Rotel. Next, layer in the softened bell pepper and onions on top of the ground beef mixture, followed by ¼ cup of the jalapenos. 

    STEP 6. Make the creamy topping. Stir together the sour cream, mayonnaise, cream cheese, and then fold in 1 cup of shredded cheddar cheese.

    STEP 7. Spread the mixture. Spread the sour cream mixture over the casserole.

    STEP 8. Add cheese and jalapenos. Top with the remaining 2 cups of cheddar cheese and ¼ cup of jalapeño peppers. 

    STEP 9. Bake. Pop the casserole in the preheated oven and bake for 35 minutes or until the cheese is melted and the casserole is heated throughout.

    Inside of casserole dish showing John Wayne Casserole ingredients.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Storebought Crescent Rolls. Crescent Roll dough is so convenient but, if you have time on your hands, you can make your own dough and use it in this recipe.
    • Can this be made ahead of time? One of the beautiful things about casseroles (including this one) is that you easily make one ahead of time. See below for tips on making this a freezer meal! 
    Serving of John Wayne casserole on white plate.

    Recipe FAQs


    Why is it called John Wayne casserole?

    Back in the '70s, John Wayne contributed an almost identical recipe to a cookbook loaded with celebrity favorites. The book is called Cooking with Love From Cara Connery and Her Friends. No one knows where Wayne got the original recipe but it's been around ever since. 

    What is the oldest known casserole?

    Mac and cheese (although not considered a casserole necessarily anymore) is the oldest known casserole.

    What to Serve with John Wayne Casserole

    When it comes to side dishes for casseroles, we like leafy greens or breads. For this recipe, we really like serving this side salad with it and this Italian white bread.

    Storage

    Leftover Casserole: This casserole makes for wonderful leftovers. It stores and reheats well. Allow the casserole to cool completely before covering it in a layer of plastic wrap and placing it in the refrigerator. You can keep it there for up to 4 days. You can also scoop the casserole out of your dish and store it in a separate airtight container.

    Can you freeze this casserole? Yes. Prepare the recipe up until the point of baking, cover it in 2 layers of plastic wrap, and pop it in the freezer. It can stay there for up to 3 months.

    Thawing: If you freeze this casserole- when you're ready to serve, transfer the casserole to the refrigerator to thaw. Remove the plastic wrap and cover with aluminum foil. Bake at 325 degrees F for 20-30 minutes or until heated through. You can also pop an individual slice in the microwave. Microwave in 30-second intervals until the portion is heated through. 

    More Casserole Recipes You’ll Love

    If you love casseroles or easy dinner ideas, you’ll love these other recipes that we have for you:

    • A wooden spoon dishing out a serving of meatball casserole in a 9x13 baking dish.
      Meatball Casserole
    • 9x13 baking dish with party potatoes inside, and a wooden serving spoon, spooning it out.
      Party Potatoes
    • Ham and cheese croissant bake serving being lifted out of baking dish.
      Ham and Cheese Croissant Bake
    • Spoonful of Stove Top Stuffing Chicken Casserole.
      Stove Top Stuffing Chicken Casserole

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Serving of John Wayne Casserole on a white plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 6 votes

    John Wayne Casserole

    John Wayne Casserole is a delicious blend of meats and cheeses, and combined with a creamy base as well has peppers and spices.
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 55 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 9 servings
    Calories 696kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 pack Crescent Roll dough
    • 1 pound ground beef
    • 1 pound ground pork
    • 1 ounce pack taco seasoning
    • 1 green pepper chopped
    • 10 ounce can Rotel
    • ½ cup canned sliced jalapenos divided
    • ½ cup sour cream
    • ½ cup mayonnaise
    • 8 ounces cream cheese
    • 3 cups shredded cheddar cheese divided

    Instructions

    • Prep. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F and grease a 9 X 13-inch baking pan with nonstick cooking spray.
    • Make the crust. Line the pan with the Crescent Roll dough. The dough should completely cover the bottom and stretched to the sides of the pan. Bake for 10 minutes.
    • Cook the meat. Using a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the beef, pork, and taco seasoning and sauté until the meat is browned and cooked through, breaking it up and mixing as you go. Drain and remove the meat from the skillet.
    • Cook the veggies. In the same skillet, sauté the green peppers and onion until softened.
    •  Assemble the casserole. Spread the seasoned, cooked meat over the Crescent Roll crust followed by the Rotel. Next, layer in the softened bell pepper and onions followed by ¼ cup of the jalapenos. 
    • Add the creamy topping. Stir together the sour cream, mayonnaise, cream cheese, and then fold in 1 cup of shredded cheddar cheese. Spread the mixture over the casserole and top with the remaining 2 cups of cheddar cheese and ¼ cup of jalapenos. 
    • Bake. Pop the casserole in the oven and bake for 35 minutes or until the cheese is melted and the casserole is heated throughout.

    Notes

    Leftovers store and reheat well. Allow the casserole to cool completely before covering it in a layer of plastic wrap and placing it in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
    Can you freeze this casserole? Yes, cover it in 2 layers of plastic wrap and pop it in the freezer. It can stay there for up to 3 months.
    Thawing: Transfer the casserole to the refrigerator to thaw. Remove the plastic wrap and cover with aluminum foil. Bake at 325 degrees F for 20-30 minutes or until heated through.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cup | Calories: 696kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 30g | Fat: 57g | Saturated Fat: 24g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 146mg | Sodium: 925mg | Potassium: 469mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1242IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 331mg | Iron: 3mg

    Sweet and Spicy Pumpkin Seeds

    August 24, 2023

    Sweet and spicy pumpkin seeds in a white bowl.

    This roasted sweet and spicy pumpkin seed recipe is incredibly easy and they have tons of flavor. The spice comes from the chili powder and can be adjusted to your preference.

    Plus, while you’re making these to snack on, you might as well make our favorite “Texas Trash” to snack on too, and these chocolate-covered pumpkin strawberries!

    This recipe and post was originally published in 2021, and updated in August 2023.

    Sweet and spicy pumpkin seeds on wooden cutting board.

    Anything pumpkin during the fall months is a must! So if you have pumpkin on your mind, I want to make sure you know about these pumpkin cheesecake bars and this pumpkin pie with graham cracker crust.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Use up more of your pumpkin: If you have seeds from your pumpkin carving, don’t waste the seeds! This is a great way to use them up.
    • The flavor: Boring pumpkin seeds are just as wasteful as throwing them out. This recipe gives the seeds tons of flavor.
    • Make them ahead of time: These crunchy pumpkin seeds freeze and thaw nicely. Once they have cooled completely, seal them in an airtight container or a sturdy Ziploc bag (be sure to get as much air out as possible) and store them in the freezer. They will stay good for up to 6 months. Allow them to thaw at room temperature before diving in. 

    Ingredients Needed

    Here’s what you’ll need to make these pumpkin seeds – but make sure you scroll to the recipe card at the bottom to see all of the recipe’s details in one place.

    • Pumpkin seeds
    • Olive oil - Feel free to use coconut oil (or really any other quality cooking oil) instead. Just note that each oil will have a slightly different taste.   
    • Honey - You could use agave instead. 
    • Salt 
    • Pepper
    • Chili powder 
    • Cinnamon - Leave the cinnamon out if you're not in a cinnamon kind of mood. You could also use pumpkin spice in place of the cinnamon and nutmeg. 
    • Nutmeg - You can leave the nutmeg out if you'd like. Pumpkin spice will also work in place of the cinnamon and nutmeg.
    • Brown sugar 
    • Worcestershire sauce - The Worcestershire sauce is optional but I think it adds a wonderful savory element to this subtly sweet snack. 

    Variations

    You could make these crispy pumpkin seeds in the air fryer instead of the oven if you'd like. Preheat the air fryer to 350 degrees F and line its basket with parchment paper to prevent the seeds from falling through. Season the seeds as you normally would, arrange them in the basket of the air fryer, and air fry for 20 minutes, shaking halfway through. 

    Equipment

    Check your kitchen for the following items before you get cooking. 

    • Paper towels – To dry the seeds. 
    • Mixing bowls
    • Wooden spoon or spatula – To stir the seeds. 
    • Baking sheet 
    • Parchments paper 

    What if I don’t have parchment paper? If you don't have parchment paper, you can use nonstick cooking spray instead. Just be extra sure to give the seeds a good stir a couple of times as they roast.  

    How to Make This Pumpkin Seeds Recipe

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    • Prep. Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F and line a baking pan with parchment paper. 
    • Clean. If you are using fresh pumpkin seeds, rinse them of their pulp and dry them thoroughly. If you are using store-bought seeds, you can skip this step. 
    Steps 1-4 of how to make spicy pumpkin seeds.
    • Make the spice mixture. Whisk together the honey, Worcestershire, salt, pepper, chili powder, cinnamon, nutmeg, and brown sugar. 
    • Season. Toss the pumpkin seeds with the olive oil mixture to coat and then with the spice mixture. 
    • Bake. Sprinkle the seasoned seeds in an even layer over the prepared baking sheet. Bake for 50 minutes or until golden brown. Give the seeds a stir every 15 minutes or so. 
    Roasted pumpkin seeds on a cookie sheet.

    Should I eat sweet and spicy pumpkin seeds warm or cold?: Sweet and spicy roasted pumpkin seeds are best enjoyed at room temperature. Once they come out of the oven, they will continue to crisp up as they cool. So have a little patience and give them some time to do their thing. 

    Sweet and spicy pumpkin seeds on a baking sheet.

    Recipe FAQs

    What are pumpkin seeds vs. pepitas?

    Pumpkin seeds and pepitas are often confused. The term pepita refers to a pumpkin seed that has been shelled. They are usually roasted and generally come from Styrian pumpkins, specifically.  


    Do I have to use store-bought pumpkin seeds or can I make my own?

    You can 100% use your own. This recipe is a great way to use the pumpkin seeds you might otherwise throw away from your carving pumpkins (and/or a pie pumpkins). Treat them just as you would store-bought pumpkin seeds; just be sure to clean and dry them very well. If you have the time, spread your pumpkin seeds over a baking sheet and allow them to dry out for several hours (up to overnight) before seasoning and roasting. 

    Sweet and spicy pumpkin seeds in white bowl.

    Storage

    Once the pumpkin seeds have fully cooled, seal them in an airtight container and store them on the countertop  (ideally out of the sun) for up to 1 month, in the fridge for up to 3 months, or in the freezer for up to 6 months. If you decide to freeze them, allow the seeds to thaw at room temperature before enjoying them. 

    More Snack Recipes You’ll Love

    If you love fun snacks, then you’ll also love this Sriracha and Honey Snack Mix and these easy snack recipes:

    • A basket full of baseball snack ideas.
      Baseball Snack Ideas for Kids (Easy + Team Snack Ideas Moms Love)
    • Pumpkin cheese ball on plate surrounded by crackers.
      Pumpkin Cheese Ball
    • Pumpkin fluff in Pyrex serving bowl, with Reddi Wip and pumpkin pie spice on top.
      Pumpkin Fluff
    • Cheese dip in sauce pan, with soft pretzels surrounding it.
      Pretzel Cheese Dip

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Sweet and spicy pumpkin seeds in a white bowl.
    Print Pin
    3.67 from 3 votes

    Sweet and Spicy Pumpkin Seed Recipe

    These roasted sweet and spicy pumpkin seeds are made using simple ingredients and they have so much flavor.
    Course Snack
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 50 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour
    Servings 1 cup
    Calories 618kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup pumpkin seeds
    • 1 Tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 Tablespoon honey
    • ½ teaspoon chili powder
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • ½ teaspoon pepper
    • 1 ½ teaspoon salt
    • 1 teaspoon nutmeg
    • 1 Tablespoon brown sugar
    • ½ Tablespoon Worcestershire sauce

    Instructions

    • Prep. Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F and line a baking pan with parchment paper.
    •  Clean. If you are using fresh pumpkin seeds, rinse them of their pulp and dry them thoroughly. If you are using store-bought seeds, you can skip this step.  
    • Make the spice mixture. Whisk together the honey, Worcestershire, salt, pepper, chili powder, cinnamon, nutmeg, and brown sugar. 
    • Season. Toss the pumpkin seeds with the olive oil mixture to coat and then with the spice mixture. 
    • Bake. Sprinkle the seasoned seeds in an even layer over the prepared baking sheet. Bake for 50 minutes or until golden brown. Give the seeds a stir every 15 minutes or so.

    Notes

    If you'd like to make a sweet snack instead, boil the seeds with sugar rather than salt, and at the seasoning stage, add sugar or brown sugar, cinnamon, etc.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cup | Calories: 618kcal | Carbohydrates: 41g | Protein: 20g | Fat: 46g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 15g | Monounsaturated Fat: 21g | Trans Fat: 0.04g | Sodium: 3625mg | Potassium: 662mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 31g | Vitamin A: 327IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 84mg | Iron: 7mg

    Cream Cheese Corn Dip

    August 23, 2023

    Chip holding a bite of crack corn dip, above bowl of dip.

    This easy-to-make cream cheese corn dip recipe is a stellar blend of sweet, savory, and creamy elements, making it the perfect appetizer recipe for any occasion such as summer cookouts, an adult game night, or even a last-minute delicious snack recipe.

    Crack Corn Dip on tortilla chip.

    Imagine the taste of succulent corn, blended with tangy cheese and a secret blend of spices, served with a crunch of fresh tortilla chips. This will quickly become one of your favorite dips.

    Have the urge to make some more corn recipes after trying this dip? A simple idea is Instant Pot Corn on the Cob which works as a side dish for almost any main meal. Or you could try using it in a main course such as Pasta with Corn and Tomatoes that will fill up the whole family.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Easy to make: The dip is quick to prepare and just needs time to chill, no cooking required!
    • Serve hot or cold: If you do want a warm dip, you can also easily heat this up with the instructions below.
    • Create a big batch: The recipe makes around 5 cups but you can create a bigger batch as needed.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a handful of ingredients with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the simple ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for corn dip with cream cheese.
    • Corn – We use southwest corn for the best results, it comes in a can and is very easy to use.
    • Cream – Sour cream is the best for the recipe and is mixed with mayonnaise and cream cheese to get the best dip consistency.
    • Jalapenos –  We use canned jalapenos, just give them a thorough drain before using. You can use fresh ones if you prefer.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Green chili peppers: If green chili peppers are unavailable, feel free to substitute them with any other chili peppers you have on hand. For a milder flavor, use canned chili peppers. You can also try green chilies. 
    • Jalapenos: If jalapenos are too spicy for your liking or you can’t find them, you can substitute them with bell peppers for a milder flavor. If you still want a bit of heat, consider using mild Anaheim peppers.
    • Green Onions: Chives can be a great substitute for green onions, offering a similar but milder flavor. If you need a stronger flavor, you can use small amounts of white or yellow onions instead.
    • Colby Jack Cheese: In the absence of Colby Jack cheese, you can use a mix of Colby and Monterey Jack cheese. Cheddar cheese can also serve as a substitute due to its similar texture and taste.
    • Pepper Jack Cheese: If you don’t have access to Pepper Jack Cheese, Monterey Jack is a good alternative. For a spicy kick similar to Pepper Jack, you can add a dash of crushed red pepper or a small amount of jalapenos to the Monterey Jack cheese.

    Variations

    This Crack Corn Dip recipe is quite versatile and allows for several tweaks, based on your personal preference or dietary needs:

    • Vegan Crack Corn Dip: Substitute dairy products with vegan-friendly alternatives. Use vegan cream cheese, vegan mayonnaise, and vegan sour cream for the base. Vegan cheese can replace Colby Jack and Pepper Jack cheese. 
    • Spicy Crack Corn Dip: If you have a penchant for a hotter dip, consider doubling the jalapenos and adding a dash of hot sauce. You could also include a pinch of cayenne pepper or another delicious way is to use a hotter variety of chili peppers. 
    • Mexican-style Crack Corn Dip: Add a Mexican twist by incorporating black beans, diced tomatoes, and a sprinkle of taco seasoning. You could also top the dip with fresh cilantro and a squeeze of lime juice for added zest. You’ll love this Mexican Corn Dip for the perfect Mexican appetizer!
    • Bacon Corn Dip: For a meatier version, include crispy, pre-cooked bacon pieces into the mix. The smoky flavor of the bacon pairs wonderfully with the creamy, sweet corn base for this great dip.

    How to Make Cream Cheese Corn Dip

    This corn dip recipe is broken into 2 components:

    • Make the basic dip
    • Add the extra flavor

    For optimal mixing, it is recommended to use cream cheese at room temperature. To quickly soften the cream cheese, place it in a microwave-safe serving bowl and heat it in 30-second intervals until it stirs smoothly into your dip mixture.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    STEP 1: Mix the dip. In a large bowl, blend together mayonnaise, sour cream, cream cheese, and garlic until thoroughly combined, resulting in a velvety and smooth mixture. (Image 1-2).

    Steps 1-4 of making crack corn dip.

    STEP 2: Add the flavor. Incorporate southwest corn, green chili peppers, jalapenos, green onion bacon crumbles, Colby jack cheese, pepper jack cheese, and ground black pepper into the mayonnaise mixture. Ensure thorough blending for a delectable combination. (Image 3-4).

    STEP 3: Chill the mixture. Refrigerate, covered, for a minimum of 1 hour to achieve optimal chilling.

    STEP 4: Add toppings and serve. Before serving, generously sprinkle your favorite corn chips with extra Colby jack cheese and a garnish of finely chopped green onions.

    Corn dip mixed and in white bowl, with corn chip in dip.

    BONUS STEP: How to heat the dip. Begin by preheating your oven to 350 degrees. Next, generously grease an 8×8 baking dish. Carefully place the crack corn dip into the prepared baking dish, ensuring it is evenly spread. Cover the dish and heat it for approximately 20 minutes, or until the dip is heated throughout and the cheese is beautifully melted.

    Sprinkle extra Colby jack cheese on top and bake the dip uncovered for approximately 5 minutes, or until the cheese is melted and gooey. Serve warm with corn chips for a deliciously satisfying treat.

    Tortilla chip dipping in to corn dip, lifting out a bite.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Cheese Recommendations: Cheeses can vary drastically in flavor. For a unique touch, try using smoked cheeses or cheeses infused with herbs or spices.
    • Dip Consistency: If you prefer your dip to be thicker, consider reducing the amount of sour cream or adding more cheese. Conversely, for a thinner dip, you could add a splash of milk or a bit more sour cream.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is there a vegan alternative for this dip?  

    Yes, you can make a vegan version of this dip by using dairy-free alternatives for the cream cheese, mayonnaise, sour cream, and cheese. There are numerous plant-based products available in the market that can be used as substitutes.

    What can I substitute for jalapenos if I don’t want the dip to be spicy?

    If you want to reduce the heat, you can substitute jalapenos with bell peppers. They provide a similar texture without spiciness.

    Can I use pre-shredded cheese for this recipe? 

    While pre-shredded cheese is certainly convenient, shredding your own cheese is recommended for the best results. Pre-shredded cheese often contains anti-caking agents and doesn’t melt as smoothly.

    Do I have to use store-bought southwest corn, or can I make my own?

    You don’t need to rely on store-bought southwest corn; instead, you can create your own blend and incorporate it into this recipe. Southwest corn consists of a delightful combination of yellow corn, poblano peppers, and red peppers, seasoned with a touch of chili spice.

    Why is my dip soggy?

    It is important to thoroughly drain all canned ingredients to achieve the desired consistency of a firm dip. Failure to do so may result in a slightly liquid texture, whereas a firm dip texture is preferred. Additionally, refrigerating the dip will further enhance its firmness, provided that the canned ingredients were properly drained beforehand.

    What to Serve with Cream Cheese Corn Dip

    Cream Cheese Corn Dip pairs beautifully with a variety of snacks and side dishes. Here are a few suggestions:

    • Tortilla Chips: The classic choice for any dip, the crunch and light flavor of tortilla chips make them an excellent carrier for the rich, creamy dip.
    • Vegetables: For a healthier option, serve with an array of colorful, crisp vegetables such as carrot sticks, celery sticks, bell pepper strips, and cucumber slices.
    • Toasted Baguette: Thinly sliced and lightly toasted baguette rounds impart a delightful crunch and a subtle, toasty flavor that complements the corn dip perfectly.
    • Crackers: Choose from a variety of crackers, like whole grain, multigrain, or Ritz for added flavor and texture.
    • Grilled Chicken or Steak Skewers: For a heartier appetizer, try serving the dip alongside grilled chicken or steak skewers. The bold, smoky flavors of the grilled meat contrast beautifully with the creamy, cheesy dip.
    • Pita Chips: Thick, crunchy pita chips can hold up to the hearty corn dip without getting soggy. Plus, they add a lovely toasted flavor. 

    Remember, you can always mix and match these options to create a serving platter that caters to all tastes and dietary preferences. Plain potato chips are also a great option for last-minute snacks.

    Storage

    Storing and preserving Crack Corn Dip is quite straightforward. After serving, immediately refrigerate and store leftovers in an airtight container. This dip will stay fresh in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. 

    If you’re thinking about freezing, Crack Corn Dip freezes well due to the high dairy content. To freeze, place the dip in a freezer-safe container, leaving about half an inch of space at the top to allow the dip to expand as it freezes. It can be frozen for up to 2 months. When ready to use, defrost overnight in the refrigerator.

    To make Crack Corn Dip ahead of time, prepare it as instructed, excluding the additional cheese topping and baking steps. Seal in an air-tight container and refrigerate until ready to use. This dip can be made up to 2 days in advance. When ready to serve, add the additional cheese topping and bake as per the instructions, adding a few extra minutes to the baking time to account for starting from a chilled state.

    More Appetizer Recipes You’ll Love

    Want some more ideas for easy appetizers and dips? One of our favorites is this Rotel dip with ground beef. Or, you could try a Baked Brie with Maple Syrup and Bacon for a melting cheese option that everyone will enjoy. Or, these Cream Cheese and Avocado Wontons are super simple to prepare and make good use of any leftover cream cheese.

    • how to make Traditional Italian White Bread
      Easy Italian White Bread
    • Yeast rolls in baking pan.
      Yeast Rolls Recipe
    • The best guacamole in a small bowl with fresh cilantro on top.
      The BEST Guacamole Recipe
    • Mussels cooked in white wine and garlic sauce, stacked on plate, next to toasts.
      Mussels in White Wine Sauce

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Chip holding a bite of crack corn dip, above bowl of dip.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Cream Cheese Corn Dip

    This cream cheese corn dip is easy to make and has tons of flavor with the type of corn, all the cheeses and flavors of jalapenos, green chili peppers, and bacon!
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 1 hour hour
    Total Time 1 hour hour 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 5 cups
    Calories 610kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup mayonnaise
    • ¾ cup sour cream
    • 2 ounces cream cheese softened
    • 1 tablespoon garlic minced
    • 2 15.2 cans southwest corn drained well
    • 1 4 ounce can chopped green chili peppers drained
    • ¼ cup canned chopped jalapenos drained
    • ½ cup green onion chopped, plus extra for topping
    • ⅓ cup bacon crumbles
    • 1 cup Colby Jack Cheese shredded, plus extra for topping
    • 1 cup pepper jack cheese shredded
    • 1 tablespoon ground black pepper

    Instructions

    • In a large bowl, combine mayonnaise, sour cream, cream cheese, and garlic until well mixed and smooth.
    • Add southwest corn, green chili peppers, jalapenos, green onion bacon crumbles, Colby jack cheese, pepper jack cheese, and ground black pepper to the mayonnaise mixture and combine well.
    • Cover and chill in your refrigerator for at least 1 hour.
    • Top with extra Colby jack cheese and chopped green onions before serving with your favorite corn chips.

    Notes

    Using pre-shredded cheese: While pre-shredded cheese is certainly convenient, shredding your own cheese is recommended for the best results. Pre-shredded cheese often contains anti-caking agents and doesn’t melt as smoothly.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 610kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 59g | Saturated Fat: 21g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 21g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 96mg | Sodium: 628mg | Potassium: 169mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 939IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 414mg | Iron: 1mg

    No Bake Pumpkin Pie

    August 22, 2023

    Slice of pumpkin pie made with graham cracker crust.

    Everyone loves a traditional pumpkin pie, but sometimes you want something new. Enter this No Bake Pumpkin Pie! Simply mix up pudding, pumpkin, and whipped topping for a creamy and delicious dessert in 10 minutes, that may just become one of your favorite pie recipes!

    Or, if you’re also a cheesecake fan, then you’ll want to make sure to try these pumpkin cheesecake bites too.

    Slice of pumpkin pie on spatula.

    I just love a good no-bake dessert. Many need hours of chill time, but takes just minutes to prepare. I highly recommend planning no-bake desserts for parties because you can make them the night before and forget about them! Besides pie, there are always classic chocolate no-bake cookies or quick mini cherry cheesecakes. Any one you choose will be a huge hit! But if pie is still on the menu, this cinnamon butterscotch pie is a no-bake pie that’s a must-make.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Ready in 10 minutes: It only takes 10 minutes of hands-on time to prepare this quick no-bake pumpkin pie.
    • Make-ahead recipe: This pie requires at least 3 hours in the fridge, so plan accordingly.
    • Kids can make: No oven or stove means this is easy and safe for kids to practice their cooking skills. Teach them measuring and new skills like folding in ingredients!

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for pumpkin pie with graham cracker crust.
    • Pumpkin – Make sure you are using puree and not pumpkin pie mix. This is only pumpkin with no spices or other ingredients added.
    • Pudding – Double-check that you picked up the instant pudding and NOT cook and serve. This is important to achieve the right texture.
    • Whipped topping – Yup, this recipe is best with that little blue tub in the frozen section! Thaw before using.
    • Half and half – The fat here is necessary for a thick, creamy texture in the finished pie. Don’t swap in low-fat milk.
    • Graham cracker crust – Store-bought graham cracker crust is perfect here, but you can also feel free to make your own if that’s what you prefer, or even use a Biscoff crust recipe. Just remember that adds time as it usually needs to bake and cool first.

    Substitutions

    Other than making your own pie crust, I don’t really recommend any substitutions for this recipe. Freshly whipped cream will “break” and make your pie runny compared to prepared whipped topping, which contains stabilizers. We need the fat in the half and half for the pie to set correctly, meaning you can’t use regular milk, though you can use heavy cream if that is what you have on hand.

    Equipment

    Just a whisk is required here! While you could use the whisk attachment of an electric mixer for the pudding, it isn’t truly required. I love that this means it’s super simple for kids to help out!

    How to Make No Bake Pumpkin Pudding Pie

    Leave yourself enough time to chill the pie properly! I suggest at least 3 hours, so you could make this after lunch if serving in the evening. Overnight is generally best though!

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Steps 1-4 how to make pumpkin pie with graham cracker crust.

    STEP 1. Begin mixing. Add the brown sugar and pumpkin pie spice to a large bowl (Image 1). Add in the boxed pudding mix and whisk to combine (Image 2).

    STEP 2. Whisk in the half and half. Carefully add the half and half to the powder in the bowl, then whisk for up to 2 minutes, until the pudding begins to thicken.

    Tip: Ensure you buy instant pudding and plain pumpkin puree for this recipe. Cook-and-serve pudding won’t set correctly, and the pumpkin pie mix has extra ingredients added.

    Steps 5-8 collage of making no bake pumpkin pie.

    STEP 3. Add pumpkin. Plop the pumpkin right in and stir until smooth (Images 5 and 6).

    STEP 4. Fold in topping. Use a rubber spatula to gently fold the whipped topping into the pumpkin mixture until it is completely incorporated (Images 7 and 8).

    No bake pumpkin pie in graham cracker crust, sitting on kitchen counter.

    STEP 5. Pour in crust. Pour the prepared filling into the graham cracker crust, and gently smooth out the top with your spatula.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Use chilled ingredients. The half-and-half needs to be really cold to help the pudding mixture thicken right away. Keep everything in the fridge until needed.
    • Fold gently. If folding is a new technique for you, here’s a tip: Use a rubber spatula and gently scrape the bottom of the bowl to bring the pudding mixture up into the whipped topping. Turn the bowl and repeat, until you have incorporated the whipped topping without losing the “fluff.”
    Whipped topping added on top of no bake pumpkin pie.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make this dairy-free?

    Unfortunately, most non-dairy substitutes do not allow pudding to set correctly. This recipe is best with regular dairy half and half or heavy cream.

    How far ahead can I make dessert?

    This pie will last about three days in the fridge, and the timer starts when you assemble it. Storebought crust is often thinner and more fragile than a homemade graham cracker crust, and the heavy filling could cause it to crack.

    How should I serve pumpkin pudding pie?

    Keep in the fridge until ready to serve. You can top each slice with more whipped topping (or real whipped cream!) and add a sprinkle of cinnamon or pumpkin pie spice if desired. You could also stick a mini graham cracker in the whipped topping for a fun decoration.

    Can I adjust to mini pie crusts?

    This filling would be great as mini pumpkin pies! I haven’t tested it yet to know how many it would make, but simply purchase the mini graham cracker crusts and add your filling!

    Bite taken out of pumpkin pie with a graham cracker crust.

    Storage

    This pie will keep for up to three days in the fridge. I recommend keeping it in the original pie dish and covering it with plastic wrap. Only add topping to the slices as you serve them, and don’t store it with whipped cream on top.

    More Pumpkin Recipes You’ll Love

    • Close up of pumpkin streusel muffins stacked on top of one another
      Pumpkin Streusel Muffins
    • Pumpkin fluff in Pyrex serving bowl, with Reddi Wip and pumpkin pie spice on top.
      Pumpkin Fluff
    • Slice of pumpkin poke cake on plate with fork
      Pumpkin Poke Cake
    • A stack of desserts bars with a graham cracker crust and swirled pumpkin cheesecake filling are in the center of the photo
      Pumpkin Cheesecake Bars

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Slice of pumpkin pie made with graham cracker crust.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    No Bake Pumpkin Pie

    This no bake pie takes just 10 minutes to whip together! It's perfect for a last minute dessert, as long as you leave time for chilling.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Chill 3 hours hours
    Total Time 3 hours hours 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 288kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 box instant vanilla pudding mix 3 ounces
    • 2 tablespoons brown sugar
    • 1 ½ teaspoons pumpkin pie spice
    • 1 cup half and half very cold
    • 1 cup pumpkin puree not pumpkin pie filling
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1 tub whipped topping, thawed 8 ounces
    • 1 – 9-inch graham cracker crust
    • Whipped cream for garnish optional

    Instructions

    • In a large mixing bowl, whisk together the pudding mix, brown sugar, and pumpkin pie spice.
    • Add the half and half and whisk until well combined, and the pudding starts to thicken – about two minutes.
    • Stir in the pumpkin and vanilla until combined.
    • Gently fold in the whipped topping to incorporate.
    • Finally, pour the mixture into the graham cracker crust and gently smooth the top.
    • Pop in the fridge for at least 3 hours before serving, or ideally overight. **I prefer putting it in the freezer as well, so it slices cleaner.
    • Top slices with extra whipped topping if desired.

    Video

    Notes

    NOTE: I do not recommend using milk to make this pie. The higher fat content in the half and half helps the pudding to set better than milk. You can substitute the half and half for heavy cream if needed.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 288kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 11mg | Sodium: 225mg | Potassium: 167mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 4895IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 73mg | Iron: 1mg

    Dirty Chai Latte

    August 21, 2023

    Dirty Chai Latte in clear glass mug.

    I love the warm, comforting flavors of chai, but sometimes you just want an extra boost. Adding a quick shot of espresso turns this into a Dirty Chai Latte that will get you moving! Plus, if you’re a fan of both coffee and chai tea, combining the two just makes sense for a new drink recipe!

    Dirty Chai Latte in clear glass mug.

    Are you a coffee or tea person? I know sometimes there’s a big divide – and I realized I haven’t shared much on tea so let’s change that! This Chai Latte is a great introduction to tea since it also includes espresso. If you can’t get enough espresso in your life, I also love a good Peppermint Latte, and then of course, what pairs better than Hot Chocolate Toppers?

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Cheat with concentrate: No need to brew tea bags here! Picking up a carton of concentrate makes this super simple.
    • Coffee-shop-worthy froth: With an immersion blender, you will have amazing froth and perfectly blended flavors.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for dirty chai latte.
    • Chai latte concentrate – One brand I usually see in the store is Tazo but I honestly love the Oregan Chai Tea brand the most. Look around in the coffee or juice aisle for ready-to-drink teas to find this yummy drink!
    • Milk – I prefer whole milk, but even 2% will still add some nice froth.
    • Espresso – Brew your own in an espresso maker or simply brew an extra strong cup with your usual method, such as in a French press.
    • Honey – Use honey to add a little extra sweetness, depending on what chai you are starting with.
    • Spices – These are optional, but add a fun flair. The chai is of course already “spicy” so feel free to adjust as needed.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Milk – dairy-free? Go ahead and use a substitute here, but be aware that something like almond milk won’t give you much froth. Look for “barista blends” of non-dairy alternatives for extra frothing power. Cashew and oat milk are extra creamy options.
    • Honey – if you are making this drink vegan/vegetarian with different milk, make sure and leave this out or use maple syrup.
    • Coffee – No espresso machine? Many have “strong brew” options and there are also some delicious instant espresso options at the grocery store.

    Variations

    • Temperature – serve hot or cold!
    • Late Night Cocktail – use decaf espresso and add a quick shot of Kahlúa to up the ante. Bailey’s would also be delicious.
    • Got the expertise to make your own? Feel free to use a homemade chai concentrate.

    Equipment

    I like to use an immersion blender to get really great froth. If you have a handheld milk frother that will also work, but sometimes it works better in each glass rather than the entire quantity at once. Adding everything to a blender will also work – but be sure and vent the lid and cover with a towel when blending hot liquids!

    How to Make a Hot Dirty Chai Latte

    This takes literally minutes to pull together! Start the espresso in the machine and heat up the rest of the ingredients and boom, you’re done.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Steps 1-4 how to make a dirty chai latte.

    STEP 1. Heat the drink. Add chai concentrate, milk, and honey to a small saucepan. Heat until almost boiling. (Image 1).

    Tip: Don’t let the milk boil! This only takes a few minutes to heat up so stir often and don’t walk away. Boiling will change the taste and texture of the milk, and if it boils over will be a huge mess.

    STEP 2. Add espresso. Pour the espresso evenly among 3 large mugs or glasses (Image 2).

    Star anise on top of dirty chai latte.

    STEP 3. Add froth. Froth in the pot with an immersion blender, or use a mini frother in each glass.

    STEP 4. Spice it up. Add whole spices if using, and serve!

    Dirty Chai Latte in clear glass mug.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Allow to fully cool. If you aren’t serving or drinking the entire pot full at once, pour into jars and let cool before adding a lid and storing in the fridge.
    • Don’t boil. You want to bring the milk and chai close to a boil, but not hit that point. Otherwise, your milk can scald or form a skin and no one wants that!

    Recipe FAQs

    Do I have to serve this chai latte hot?

    Nope – it’s just as good cold if that’s what you enjoy! Rather than heating the milk and concentrate, just froth it and combine it with the espresso and ice. Stir and enjoy! Use coffee ice cubes instead of regular water ice cubes to not water down your drink.

    What makes a latte “dirty”?

    Adding a shot of espresso gives this a darker, brown color – almost as if it were dirty. Don’t let that name throw you off though!

    Can this be frozen?

    Absolutely! If your concentrate will go bad before you can drink it all, go ahead and freeze just that or the entire combined recipe. Choose a leak-proof container and leave headroom for expansion when freezing.

    To serve, let thaw overnight, then gently heat on the stove until ready to drink. Then froth and pour into cups!

    What to Serve with Dirty Chai Latte

    I love this as a morning brunch pick-me-up, maybe served alongside some scones? An afternoon pick-me-up is also a great excuse to make this, and I think it’s fun to pair with some Pumpkin Streusel Muffins because they have the same spice profile.

    Storage

    Store leftovers in a lidded jar in the fridge for a couple days. You could also combine all the ingredients cold and keep in the fridge, then heat and froth at serving time.

    Prefer iced lattes? Freeze leftovers in an ice cube tray and then use to chill your latte. As they melt, they won’t water down your glass!

    More Coffee Recipes You’ll Love

    • Whipped coffee dalgona in a clear coffee mug.
      Whipped Coffee – Dalgona
    • iced coffee and cold brew
      How to Make Iced Coffee
    • iced caramel lattes with straw
      Iced Caramel Latte
    • peppermint latte in glass mug
      Peppermint Latte Recipe

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Dirty Chai Latte in clear glass mug.
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Dirty Chai Latte

    I love the warm, comforting flavors of chai, but sometimes you just want an extra boost. Adding a quick shot of espresso turns this into a Dirty Chai Latte that will get you moving!
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 2 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 3 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 3 servings
    Calories 136kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • Immersion Blender

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups chai latte concentrate
    • 2 cups whole milk
    • 6 ounces espresso prepared
    • 1 tablespoon cinnamon
    • 3 star anise
    • 1 tablespoon honey optional

    Instructions

    • Combine the latte concentrate, honey, and milk in a medium pot. Heat the mixture over medium heat while stirring until almost reaching a boil. Remove the pot from the heat.
    • Carefully blend the milk mixture with an immersion blender until foamy. No stick blender? Transfer to a countertop blender and pulse with the lid vented.
    • Split the mug of espresso among three large mugs. Then add the milk mixture on top.
    • Place a cinnamon stick and a star anise on the top of each drink, stir it in for a burst of flavor. This step is optional!

    Notes

    Do I have to use store-bought chai latte concentrate or can I make my own?
    Store-bought is more than fine here but if you have the time and the expertise, you can totally make your own chai concentrate. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 16oz | Calories: 136kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 20mg | Sodium: 75mg | Potassium: 397mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 274IU | Vitamin C: 0.5mg | Calcium: 235mg | Iron: 1mg
    • « Go to Previous Page
    • Page 1
    • Interim pages omitted …
    • Page 8
    • Page 9
    • Page 10
    • Page 11
    • Page 12
    • Interim pages omitted …
    • Page 25
    • Go to Next Page »

    Primary Sidebar

    Jessica Burgess of Fantabulosity, slicing an avocado.

    Hi, I'm Jessica! - Owner and Creator of the blog and brand, Fantabulosity.

    I’m here to help you make easy comfort food and nostalgic recipes, using simple ingredients, that everyone will love.

    More about me →

    Potluck Recipes

    • A slice of strawberry jello cake, topped with a strawberry slice, sitting on a round plate.
      Strawberry Jello Cake (Easy, Moist Strawberry Cake)
    • Crack green beans on wooden spoon.
      Crack Green Beans
    • Old fashioned potluck cake recipes collage.
      Old-Fashioned Cakes That Still Show Up at Every Potluck
    • Collage of potluck desserts.
      Easy Potluck Desserts (Simple Recipes That Always Get Asked For)
    • Cold Pasta Salad Recipes Collage.
      Cold Pasta Salad Recipes
    • Chicken Casserole recipes image collage.
      20 Chicken Casserole Recipes

    Popular Recipes

    • bread pudding in baking dish
      Bread Pudding Recipe: Easy Old Fashioned Recipe (With Video!)
    • Burger baked in the oven, steamed in aluminum foil, and placed on white plate.
      Burgers in the Oven
    • two tuna salad sandwiches stacked on top of each other
      The BEST Tuna Salad Recipe
    • Sliced banana bread on white platter
      Best Banana Bread
    • Strawberry brownies on white marble cutting board.
      Strawberry Brownies Recipe
    • Cheeseburger Sliders
      Cheeseburger Sliders with Hawaiian Rolls

    Footer

    ↑ back to top

    Featured In

    About

    • About Jessica
    • Contact
    • Collaborate
    • Dinner System

    Easy Recipes

    • All Recipes
    • Vintage Recipes
    • Dinner Recipes
    • Desserts

    How to Cook

    • Oven-Baked
    • Stove-Top
    • No Bake
    • Cooking Basics

    Privacy Policy |Accessibility Copyright © 2026 Fantabulosity | Terms & Conditions | FTC
    All recipes, photos, and content are copyrighted and may not be reproduced, republished, or distributed without written permission.

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required